De 34

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12
NOKIA TALK-FAMILY GSM 900/1800/1900 BTS PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 465267A.403, Version 4
Copyright Nokia Telecommunications 1998, 1
Nokia Talk-family GSM 900/GSM 1800/GSM 1900 Base Transceiver Station, B6Z 051024AE/4.0.0
1. INTRODUCTION
This document introduces the Nokia Talk-family products. The document describes the main features and options. DE 34 is the product code for the GSM 900 products and DF 34 for the GSM 1800 products, whereas DG 35 is the product code for the GSM 1900 products. The BTS performs the radio function for the Base Station System (BSS) and is connected to the Base Station Controller (BSC) via the A-bis interface and to the Mobile Stations (MS) via the Air interface. The BSC is further connected to the Mobile Switching Centre (MSC) and the Network Management System (NMS). The BSS interfaces are shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1. Base Station System
1.1. References
[1] TBU Unit Description D6Z 467155AE
[2]
AFH Unit Description D6Z 467151AE
1.2. Product Family

Nokia Talk-family comprises the following products: Nokia Flexitalk and Nokia Flexitalk+ Nokia Intratalk Nokia Citytalk and Nokia Citytalk+ Nokia Extratalk and Nokia Extratalk+ with three alternatives: Extratalk AC/DC, Extratalk AC/AC and Extratalk Extension.
2. MAIN FEATURES
2.1. Services
Nokia Talk-family BTSs provide the following features: Standard telecom features Speech services Data services Short Message Service Point-to-point Short Message Service Cell Broadcast Half-Rate Speech.
The communications software follows the GSM A-bis Telecom specifications. The following logical channel configurations are supported as specified in the GSM recommendations: TCH/F (speech or data) + FACCH/F + SACCH/TF FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH + SDCCH/4 + SACCH/C4 SDCCH/8 + SACCH/C8 SDCCH/8 + SACCH/8 + CBCH FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH + SDCCH/4 + SACCH/C4 + CBCH in which:
TCH/F FACCH SACCH FCCH SCH BCCH CCCH SDCCH CBCH
Traffic Channel/Full Rate Fast Associated Control Channel Slow Associated Control Channel Frequency Correction Channel Synchronization Channel Broadcast Control Channel Common Control Channel Stand-Alone Dedicated Control Channel Cell Broadcast Channel
The maximum number of SDCCH channels per one TRX is 12, limited by the transmission capacity per one TRX on the A-bis interface. The design of the BTS supports half-rate coding with minimum need for hardware upgrade. The following logical channel configurations are supported as specified in the GSM recommendations: TCH/H(0,1) + FACCH/H(0,1) + SACCH/TH(0,1) TCH/H(0) + FACCH/H(0) + SACCH/TH(0) + TCH/H(1) The DTX (Discontinuous Transmission, activated by speech activity) function is supported as specified by the relevant GSM recommendations. Stream ciphering and deciphering of the Air interface traffic and signalling are supported as defined in the GSM recommendations. The BTS supports several ciphering algorithms optional as defined in the GSM recommendations: A5/0 A5/1 A5/2 no ciphering
The BTS supports the short message services defined in the GSM recommendations: Point-to-point short message service for both mobile originating and mobile terminating calls. Cell broadcast short message service.
Call set-up is possible without an SDCCH channel. A TCH is set up for "Signalling only", and switched over to normal speech operation, when needed.
2.2. Transmission
Nokia Talk-family BTSs have five options for transmission interfaces:
Three 2 Mbit/s PCM E1 interfaces Three 1,5 Mbit/s PCM T1 interfaces Two 0,5 Mbit/s, 1 Mbit/s and 2 Mbit/s HDSL interfaces Four ISDN-S interfaces Radio link.
The following are the main features of the Nokia Talk-family BTS transmission interfaces: Integrated A-bis submultiplexing equipment (16 kbit/s signalling) with max. 12 TRXs in one 2.0 Mbit/s PCM E1 link (ETSI) or max. 10 TRXs in one 1.5 Mbit/s PCM T1 link (ANSI). The E1 capacity can be increased to max. 15 BTSs with one TRX in each, if all air interface capacity is not utilized in the A-bis interface. Two HDSL (ETSI) interfaces (512 kbit/s - 2048 kbit/s) supporting one and two wire normal, partial and back-up connections. TRX capacity for the HDSL interface is 3 to 12 TRXs depending on the transmission speed used. Supports multidrop chain, loop and star PCM and HDSL connections. Integrated repeater functionality up to 20 dB cable losses (approx. 1 km or 0.6 miles distance with 2.0 Mbit/s (E1) or 1.5 Mbit/s (T1) twisted pair connection). Two configurable 2 Mbit/s ISDN-S and two ISDN-S extension interfaces managed from the BSC with one ISDN-S connection per TRX. Full support for radio relay in Nokia Intratalk and Nokia Citytalk provides additional flexibility for network planning. All necessary functions and alarms are remotely available from the centralized NMS or BSC site.
Figure 2. BTS Transmission Connections 2.2.1. A-bis Interface - 16/32/64 kbit/s Signalling Links Usually each BTS requires one 16/64 kbit/s PCM timeslot assigned for the O&M signalling between the BTS and the BSC. one 16/32/64 kbit/s slot for each TRX for the telecom signalling between the BTS and the
BSC. eight 16 kbit/s slots for each TRX for speech/data traffic.
In addition, some capacity is required for loop control if the loop configuration is used. The maximum number of TRXs in one 2 Mbit/s E1 signal (numbers for 1.5 Mbit/s T1 signal in parentheses) in different network configurations with 16, 32, and 64 kbit/s signalling is presented in Table 1. Table 1.
Configuration Point-To-Point Multidrop
Maximum Number of TRXs with 16, 32, and 64 kbit/s Signalling

16 kbit/s 12 TRXs (10 TRXs) 12 TRXs (10 TRXs) 32 kbit/s 12 TRXs (9 TRXs) 11 TRXs (9 TRXs) 64 kbit/s 10 TRXs (7 TRXs) 7 TRXs (6 TRXs)
To save transmission capacity it is also possible to limit the amount of speech/data slots per TRX from eight to six or seven. Thus for instance 15 BTSs, one TRX in each, can be allocated to the same 2 Mbit/s PCM channel (E1). This requires the use of DN2 guard on the BSC side. 2.2.2. Repeater Functions in BTS with TRUA Unit Terminal Repeater Function in BTS The BTS can be a part of a line repeater chain without any external terminal repeaters. Two of the A-bis interfaces in the BTS can tolerate 20 dB attenuation. The maximum distance between these A-bis interfaces and the next line repeater depends on the cable type used. A typical distance with symmetrical cables is about 1 km (0.6 miles). Greater distances can be achieved by placing a line repeater in line within 1 km (0.6 miles) from the BTS site. When coaxial cables are used, the distance can be considerably longer. If only one Transmission Unit (TRUA) is installed, the third A-bis connection in the BTS can tolerate 6 dB attenuation, and it has a maximum range of 300 meters (0.2 miles) with symmetrical cables. If two Transmission Units are installed, the BTS has four 20 dB A-bis interfaces. Signal Bypass Repeater Functions in BTS When a sustained power failure takes place in a BTS, it is necessary to maintain transmission to other BTS equipment in the multidrop configuration. This is possible if a terminal repeater is fitted before the first BTS in the network. The terminal repeater generates the current needed in the BTS for the signal bypass function. The need for additional line repeaters depends on the distance between the BTS and the terminal repeater. The bypass function is possible between two 2 Mbit/s (E1) or 1.5 Mbit/s (T1) interfaces with 120 ohm (E1) or 100 ohm (T1) twisted pair connections in the transmission unit. During the bypass function, the timeslots are connected straight through the BTS from the first line interface to the second line interface without any cross-connections.
2.2.3. Microwave Radio Relay Links Integrated Radio Relay Equipment (Option) The BTS is compatible with the Nokia Digital Radio Relay Equipment. The BTS can be equipped with up to two integrated radio relay units. The Indoor Unit (RRI) is a plug-in unit installed in the BTS cabinet and the Outdoor Unit (RRO, also known as OU) is installed outside the BTS. The incorporation of the two links makes it possible to build up a drop-and-insert microwave relay network for the BTS units to communicate with the BSC. A single radio relay equipment carries up to four 2 Mbit/s A-bis links and is effectively transparent, offering the same capacity and configuration possibilities as the cabled A-bis connections. Any of the 2 Mbit/s signals, or a part of the 2 Mbit/s signals at 16 kbit/s level, can be dropped to the BTS, and the remaining capacity is available for other BTSs. The frequency range of the radio relay is 18/23/38 GHz. The integrated radio relay equipment is connected to the BTS and to the microwave head with two cables. This option is available for all BTSs except for Nokia Flexitalk BTSs. 2.2.4. Duplicated Transmission Card (Option) It is possible to use a second, optional transmission card (TRU) to expand the number of possible transmission links from 3 x 2 Mbit/s to 4 x 2 Mbit/s for E1 link and from 3 x 1.5 Mbit/s to 4 x 1.5 Mbit/s for T1 link. This option is available for all BTSs except for Nokia Flexitalk BTSs.
2.3. Operation and Maintenance

Fully remotely controllable from the Nokia NMS and BSC site. Down-loadable SW (directly from BSC or through BSC from NMS). Automatic reconfiguration function in the case of a failure ensures service. The Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) recovery procedure is automatically performed without any actions from the operator: only the alarms are forwarded to the operator. Floating TRX in BTS SW DF3.0. Floating redundant TRX is a common unit for all three sectors, minimizing the redundant hardware needed. The non-volatile flash memory of the units provides quick recovery after a power shutdown and an economical way to implement new features. User friendly menu-based Man-Machine Interface (MMI) software for quick fault locating and efficient testing on the BTS site. Immediate access to fault and status information that is displayed on the Operation and Maintenance (O&M) unit front panel (numerical display), and by coloured LEDs on the unit front panels. The O&M unit controls and initializes all the other units in the BTS to provide intelligent
and efficient control and fault handling. It stores a backup copy of the BTS unit software and configuration data. A BTS status database is located and automatically updated in the O&M unit. Most O&M functions can be performed either locally using the MMI and service terminal (ST) or remotely over the A-bis interface. The O&M communication in A-bis interface is implemented for the most part according to Nokia's internal specifications. The PCM-synchronized oven oscillator master clock unit requires no recalibration. A combination of internal loop tests for self-testing. Optional Site Test Monitor unit (STM) for a range of measurements which are performed from NMS, BSC and BTS site: STM originating test call. STM terminating test call. BCCH field strength measurement via STM antenna. Loop test via cable or via air. Receiver antenna measurement. Receiver sensitivity measurement.
2.3.1. Man-Machine Interface The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) software is used for commissioning, quick fault locating, and efficient on-site testing of the BTS. The MMI is accessed by connecting a PC to a serial port on the BCF. For example, it can be used for the following tasks: checking and upgrading SW versions checking and upgrading HW database resetting the BTS or part of it for testing purposes local blocking of a sector or a TRX for service or upgrading operations checking the alarms running the BTS internal tests
2.3.2. Transmission Control and Configuration The standard control functions of the Nokia transmission equipment are supported. This enables the transmission equipment to be controlled locally with the Service Terminal (ST) or remotely from the network via the A-bis interface. When the transmission equipment is operated locally with the ST, the monitoring of the transmission
equipment by BTS O&M functions is automatically disabled to prevent unnecessary alarms to the BSC. The remote control of BTS transmission can be arranged in two ways. When using the Q1 data channel in specified a PCM timeslot the transmission control is totally apart from the other BTS O&M functions. The other way is to transfer the transmission control information over the A-bis interface as a part of other BTS O&M signalling. All cabinets have a Nokia-specific external control port for the operation and maintenance of the external transmission equipment. 2.3.3. Software Downloading The BTS software is downloadable from the BSC, NMS or from the MMI. Software can be downloaded and saved to the non-volatile memory (EEPROM) in background during normal operation minimizing the duration of service break when the SW upgrading is done. All BTS SW excluding the SW of transmission units is downloadable. 2.3.4. Testing Capabilities The BTS functions can be monitored in numerous ways. Some of the tests are run automatically, for example each time the BTS or part of it is reset. Some of the tests must be triggered outside the BTS, either locally from the MMI or remotely from A-bis interface. Self-tests during Start-Up In the start-up phase each unit equipped with a processor tests itself as thoroughly as possible and sends the test report to the BCF. TRX Loop Test Both TX and RX paths of the TRX can be tested by the TRX loop test without any additional HW. This test can be triggered locally or remotely. The TRX loop test cannot be run if baseband hopping is used. TRX - TRU Loop Test The connection between each TRX and TRU can be tested with the TRX-TRU loop test. This test can be run only locally when there is no active connection to the BSC. TX Antenna Supervision Two alarm levels are provided, monitoring the TX antenna VSWR. The initial calibration of the VSWR measurements should be performed at the site. RX Antenna Supervision
The product reports a fault if the antenna VSWR is out of limits, for example due to mechanical damage or icing. Two alarm levels are provided, monitoring the RX antenna VSWR. The initial calibration should be performed at the site. RX antenna supervision is also available when a Nokia Masthead Preamplifier is used. RX antenna supervision is available only with the STM. If dual duplexing is used, the common RX/TX antenna is monitored via the RTC or the AFE as TX antenna supervision. BCCH supervision The BTS monitors the transmitted power level constantly and in the case of failure an alarm indicating missing BCCH transmission is generated. Local Battery Test The Battery Backup Unit of the BTS can be tested locally with the MMI which switches off the rectifiers and measures the time between the switch-off and battery alarm. During the tests the rectifiers are controlled automatically by the BTS SW. 2.3.5. Fault Localization Real-time alarm status information is shown on the MMI main window. The alarms can be seen either correlated or non-correlated. The alarm history is available and can be saved in a separate file during an MMI session. A four-digit numeric display on the BCF unit shows the most urgent alarm and the numeric codes indicate the faulty parts of the BTS. The TRX units have a display indicating the following: ongoing TRX initialization phase TX power ON/OFF channel number (when no hopping or baseband hopping is used) hopping mode when synthesizer hopping is used ongoing TRX loop test
Each electronic plug-in unit is equipped with red FLT (fault) and green OPR (operating) LEDs. In addition, some units have a yellow ALM (alarm) LED. When the unit is powered up, the LEDs will be lit up for one second. If the LEDs fail to light up, there is a power failure in the BTS. The green LED blinks during SW downloading. The yellow LED informs of an abnormal condition, but not necessarily a fault, in the unit. After SW loading and configuration, the green LED indicates that the unit operates normally. During power-up the BTS performs a self-test. If a fatal alarm is detected, the fault in the unit is indicated by the red LED.
2.4. Radio Interface

Dynamic power control range 30 dB in 2 dB steps. Remotely tunable (cavity) and wideband (hybrid) combiners as alternative units. In Nokia Flexitalk only the wideband combiner is applicable. Receiver diversity is a standard feature. Fully integrated duplex filter is a standard feature. Optional Masthead Preamplifier eliminates receiver branch cable loss. Both synthesized (with wideband combiners) and baseband frequency hopping are included as standard features. Optional Booster configuration to provide the same geographic coverage with fewer base stations.
2.4.1. Performance Radio Interface Performance Specifications The equipment conforms to the following GSM 900/GSM 1800/GSM 1900 specifications: GSM11.21, GSM05.05 (GSM 900/GSM 1800) J-STD-007 Air Interface,
when applicable. Power Output The TRX unit can deliver 20 - 40 W (nominal 30 W) output power at the transmitter output. (GSM 1800 Class 1; GSM 900 Class 5). The typical output power levels (at the antenna port) in GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900 configurations are presented in Table 2, Table 3 and Table 4. Table 2. Typical Output Power Levels in GSM 900 Configurations
AFE Flexitalk 1 TRX 2 TRX Intratalk/Citytalk 3 x 1 TRX 3 x 2 TRX 3 x 4 TRX 6 TRX, single sector 21 W * 10 W 19 W * 9W 9W RTC 15 W 14 W 12 W 11 W
* 3 dB hybrid bypassed The typical output power level for the TBU/AFH required by the optional booster configuration is 45 W in GSM 900 applications.
Table 3.
Typical Output Power Levels in GSM 1800 Configurations

AFE/AFT RTC 13 W 12 W 10 W 9W
Flexitalk
1 TRX 2 TRX
16 W */18 W 7 W/18 W 15 W */17 W 6 W / 17 W -
Intratalk/Citytalk
3 x 1 TRX 3 x 2 TRX 3 x 4 TRX 6 TRX, single sector
* 3 dB hybrid bypassed The typical output power level for the TBU/AFH required by the optional booster configuration is 45 W in GSM 1800 applications.
Table 4.
Typical Output Power Levels in GSM 1900 Configurations

AFE AFT 17 W 17 W -
Intratalk/Citytalk Intratalk/Citytalk No US requirement yet No US requirement yet * 3 dB hybrid bypassed
3 x 1 TRX 3 x 2 TRX 3 x 4 TRX 6 TRX, single sector
15 W * 9W -
The typical output power level for the TBU/AFH required by the optional booster configuration is 40 W in GSM 1900 applications.
The figures above assume gain of 3.8 dB from diversity. The product is in link balance with: 2W MS for GSM 900 1W MS for GSM 1800 and GSM 1900
When in "link balance" the signal strengths and sensitivities at the MS and BTS are such that the uplink (MS to BTS) will be of the same quality as the downlink (BTS to MS). BTS Dynamic Power Control
Table 5.
BTS Dynamic Power Control

Total Power Control Range BCCH Power Level (in 2 dB steps) Dynamic Power Control (in 2 dB steps) BCCH power level...15
GSM 900 / GSM 30 dB 0 ... 6* 1800 / GSM 1900 *It is also possible to use lower power levels (7 ... 15) with the following limitations: TX antenna VSWR measurement is not reliable unnecessary TX power level alarm may be triggered
Frequency Spacing The minimum separation of the frequencies for the transmitted signals sharing the same narrowband combiner is 600 kHz in GSM 900 and 800 kHz in GSM 1800. With the wideband combiner there are no restrictions, although for network planning it is generally impractical to use a separation narrower than 600 kHz. Receiver Sensitivity The receiver sensitivity is better than -106 dBm (typically better than -107 dBm) measured at the BTS RX antenna input. 2.4.2. Combiners Wideband Hybrid Combiners The wideband hybrid combiners are used for configurations with up to 4 TRXs per sector. Up to 2 TRXs per sector can be managed with only one combiner unit. In case of 3 or 4 TRXs per sector two combiner units and dual duplexed TX/RX antennas are required. The wideband hybrid combiners do not require tuning, and they support synthesized frequency hopping. The combiners are integrated to the AFE (Antenna Filter Unit). Antenna Filter High-Power Unit The Nokia Antenna Filter High-Power Unit (AFH) is part of the Nokia Booster configuration. The AFH is a modified filter unit that withstands the higher RF power transmitted by the Transmitter Booster Unit (TBU). The AFH also amplifies and filters uplink (received RF) before it reaches the TRX; and it filters downlink (transmitted RF). Antenna Filter Twin Unit The AFT supports dual duplex operation of the RX and TX into common antennas, i.e. one antenna per TX. It does not provide a combining function, but routes the TX signal to its own antenna output. The AFT can be used up to a 2-TRX configuration. In larger capacity systems, the AFT can be used in conjunction with the AFE. Remote Tune Combiner
The narrow-band cavity combiners are tuned remotely to the TRX carrier frequencies. There is no need for a site visit to change the frequency as the tuning operation is fully automated by the BSC and BTS software. The narrow-band combiners do not support synthesized frequency hopping. 2.4.3. Diversity Receiver diversity (spatial diversity) is available as a standard feature in all versions. The two RF signals are demodulated separately and combined by the post-detection weighted summing method. This feature is user-definable per sector. 2.4.4. Duplex Filter A duplex filter is used to combine the transmit and receive signals into a common antenna feeder. With receive diversity in use, the duplex filter reduces the number of antenna connections from 3 to 2. Duplex or non-duplex operation is determined by the cable connections during the BTS installation. Nokia Flexitalk BTS has only two antenna connections. If receive diversity is in use, duplex operation is a standard feature. 2.4.5. Extended Frequency Band The frequency band is in accordance with the GSM requirements (GSM 900 only). The extended frequency band is: RX TX 880 ... 915 MHz. 925 ... 960 MHz.
2.4.6. Frequency Hopping Frequency hopping improves the BTS MS link quality. Some improvement can be achieved even when hopping is implemented with only two frequencies, but ideally four or more frequencies spaced well apart should be used. Both synthesized and baseband frequency hopping is available. Baseband Frequency Hopping In baseband frequency hopping each TRX remains in the same frequency and the hopping is generated by switching the transmitted and received radio bursts between the TRXs by using a high-speed parallel bus. The switching is done on a "per timeslot" basis, and it enables a particular timeslot to hop from one carrier to another. Both random and cyclic hopping can be used. Baseband hopping is allowed for all BTS configurations. The number of frequencies used in the frequency-hopping sequence is the same as the number of TRXs in the sector. Synthesized Frequency Hopping
Synthesized frequency hopping is available if wideband combining is used. It enables each TRX to change frequency on successive timeslots, so that the given carrier can hop at several frequencies in quick succession. Both random and cyclic hopping can be used. Note: The carrier, on which the BCCH is transmitted, must remain at a fixed frequency at a fixed power level to enable the MS to measure the signal strength. 2.4.7. Nokia Booster Configuration The Nokia Booster product is a highly integrated solution for enabling the same geographic coverage with fewer base stations; and it fits seamlessly into Nokia Talk-family Base Station cabinets. The Booster has higher output power (EIRP) for downlink. The use of a Masthead Amplifier (MHA) together with the Booster ensures link balance when high feeder losses are present. The Booster's high downlink power also enables enhanced in-building coverage by a BTS in an urban or suburban location. A Boosted BTS has the following additional units not used in a standard BTS: TBU (Transmitter Booster Unit) AFH (Antenna Filtering High-Power Unit); this replaces the standard filtering unit. MHA (Masthead Amplifier).
For the complete description of TBU, refer to [1]. For the complete description of AFH, refer to [2]. 2.4.8. Dual Band Configuration Nokia Talk-family BTS can be configured as a Dual Band GSM 900/GSM 1800 BTS under a single BCF in a Basic or Basic + Extension cabinet configuration. DF3.0 allows the combiner to be defined as per sector. This brings further flexibility to the possible BTS configurations that can be supported, for example mixed RTC/AFE configurations. It is possible to define up to six sectors in one BTS by using AFxs. Up to six AFEs can be used in one BTS. The AFT can be selected for any sector as required. With AFT, one antenna is required per connected TRX. This may affect the number of sectors that can be used and the number of antenna connections available may be limited. Up to three RTCs can be used in one BTS. In dual band use, the RTC/RMU can be freely selected for each sector.
2.5. Connections
Both DC and AC power supplies available.
All external connections are located on the top of the cabinet. There is no need for rear access.
2.6. Alternatives and Unit Options

The alternatives and unit options in different Nokia BTSs are described in Table 6 and Table 7 below. Table 6.
Alternatives Single Sector Sectorized (two or three sectors) AFE Antenna Filter Extension Unit (max. 4 TRXs per sector) AFH Antenna Filter High-Power Unit AFT Antenna Filter Twin Unit
Alternatives in Different Nokia BTSs

Nokia Flexitalk standard not available alternative Nokia Intratalk alternative alternative alternative Nokia Citytalk alternative alternative alternative
alternative alternative in GSM 1800/1900 not available
alternative alternative in GSM 1800/1900 alternative in GSM 900/1800 alternative alternative -
alternative alternative in GSM 1800/1900 alternative in GSM 900/1800 alternative alternative alternative alternative alternative alternative alternative alternative
RTC and RMU (max. 6 TRXs per sector)
AC power feed DC power feed Heat Exchanger Air Conditioner Single Plinth Double Plinth Single Roof Double Roof
alternative alternative alternative not available -
Table 7.
Unit Options
Unit Options in Different Nokia BTSs

Nokia Flexitalk not available option not available Nokia Intratalk option option option Nokia Citytalk option option option
Integrated Radio Relay Unit (max. 2 RRI units) External Radio Relay Transmission Extension for Fourth PCM Connection with Second Transmission Unit (TRU)
Site Test Monitor Unit (STM)
STMP (Portable STM), option not available not available
option
option
DIFA Diversity Antenna Isolation Filter Unit FTS Floating Transceiver Switch
option option for GSM 900/1800
option option for GSM 900/1800 option for GSM 900 option option
Nokia Masthead Preamplifier Nokia Extratalk Redundant Common Unit Power Supply
option for GSM 900 option not available
option for GSM 900 option option
3. NOKIA FLEXITALK GSM 900/GSM 1800 BTS

Nokia Flexitalk The Flexitalk BTS can be installed in indoor or outdoor environments, on a wall-mounting bracket or on a free-standing plinth for example in offices, shopping malls and metro stations. The Flexitalk BTS can be configured as follows: 1 or 2 TRXs in one sector. One external radio relay equipment unit (e.g. DMR18-38S).
Figure 3. Flexitalk BTS Cabinet Options
4. NOKIA INTRATALK GSM 900/1800/1900 BTS
Nokia Intratalk The Intratalk cabinet is designed to house the GSM 900, the GSM 1800 and the GSM1900 BTS versions in weather-guarded locations. Up to 6 TRXs (4 TRXs for GSM 1900) in one sector in one cabinet. Up to 6 TRXs (4 TRXs for GSM 1900) divided into two or three sectors in one cabinet. Up to 12 TRXs divided into two or three sectors in two cabinets (three sectors in two cabinets for GSM 1900). A maximum of four (three in GSM 1900) radio relay equipment units; two integrated units inside the cabinet (DMR18-38I) and two external radio relay equipment units (e.g. DMR18-38S).
Figure 4. Nokia Intratalk Basic and Extension Cabinets
5. NOKIA CITYTALK GSM 900/1800/1900 BTS

Nokia Citytalk The Citytalk cabinet is designed to house the GSM 900, the GSM 1800 and the GSM 1900 BTS versions in outdoor conditions. The Citytalk BTS can be configured as follows: Up to 6 TRXs (4 TRXs for GSM 1900) in one sector in one cabinet. Up to 6 TRXs (4 TRXs for GSM 1900) divided into two or three sectors in one cabinet. Up to 12 TRXs divided into two or three sectors in two cabinets (three sectors in two cabinets for GSM 1900). A maximum of four radio relay equipment units; two integrated units inside the cabinet (DMR18-38I) and two external radio relay equipment units (e.g. DMR18-38S).
Nokia Citytalk is equipped with a heat exchanger. Nokia Citytalk+ is equipped with an air conditioner and offers a wider temperature range. Figure 5 shows the Basic Cabinet and the Extension Cabinet.
Figure 5. Nokia Citytalk Basic and Extension Cabinets
6. NOKIA EXTRATALK GSM 900/1800/1900

The Nokia Extratalk product family consists of three solutions for different applications: Nokia Extratalk AC/DC. Nokia Extratalk AC/AC (available for GSM 900/1800). Nokia Extratalk Extension.
Nokia Extratalks provide a separate Battery Backup (BBU) and Line Termination Equipment (LTE) facility, allowing both an economical way of building the whole network and freedom to use the BBU and the LTE separately. Nokia Extratalks are designed for both indoor and outdoor conditions with a closed-circuit internal airflow guaranteeing stable conditions inside the cabinet. Nokia Extratalk is equipped with a heat exchanger. Nokia Extratalk+ is equipped with an air conditioner and offers a wider temperature range.
Figure 6. Nokia Extratalk
6.1. Nokia Extratalk AC/DC
Nokia Extratalk AC/DC includes a maximum of three BBUC units and a standard 19" 6U space and DC power for extra transmission equipment, for example, radio relay, optical line terminal or symmetrical line termination equipment. Nokia Extratalk AC/DC supports all Nokia Talk-family products.
6.2. Nokia Extratalk AC/AC

Nokia Extratalk AC/AC includes one BBUE unit which provides uninterrupted power supply during a mains breakdown. The cabinet provides a standard 19" 6U space and DC power for extra transmission equipment, for example, radio relay, optical line terminal or symmetrical line termination equipment. Nokia Extratalk AC/AC supports Nokia Talk-family GSM 900/1800 BTS products.
6.3. Nokia Extratalk Extension

Nokia Extratalk Extension provides a standard 19" 20U space and DC power for extra transmission equipment. The Extratalk Extension is co-located with Nokia Extratalk AC/DC. Nokia Extratalk Extension supports Nokia Talk-family BTS products.
7. CABINET HEAT MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

The indoor cabinets are equipped with the Cabinet Cooling Fan Unit (CCF). The more demanding outdoor conditions require units such as the Heat Exchanger and Air Conditioner. The external air temperature range for the operation of Talk-family Cabinets is presented in the Table 8. Table 8.
Cabinet Nokia Flexitalk Nokia Intratalk Nokia Citytalk Nokia Extratalk
External Air Temperature Range for Nokia Talk-family Cabinets During Operation
Air Temperature Range -5 ... +45C (+23 ... +113F) (indoor cabinet) -33 ... +40C (-27 ... +104F) (outdoor cabinet) -5 ... +45C (+23 ... +45F) -33 ... +40C (-27 ... +104F) (with Heat Exchanger) -33 ... +50C (-27 ... +122F) (with Air Conditioner) -33 ... +40C (-27 ... +104F) (with Heat Exchanger) -33 ... +50C (-27 ... +122F) (with Air Conditioner)
7.1. Heat Exchanger (Flexitalk GSM 900/GSM 1800)

The function of the Heat Exchanger (MOEA, MOEB) is to cool the cabinet during operation. The Heat Exchanger sends alarm signals to the BTS when fault conditions (Low temperature, High temperature, Heat Exchanger failure) occur. The Heat Exchanger consists of three main subsections
Control board Heater Fans and recuperator
The speed of the fans and the heater are controlled by the control board. The heater is used to regulate the temperature within the BTS at low ambient temperatures. The fans and the recuperator are used to cool the air within the cabinet to ensure that the internal air temperature remains within the operating range.
7.2. Heat Exchanger (Nokia Citytalk GSM 900/1800/1900 and Nokia Extratalk GSM 900/1800/1900)
The function of the Heat Exchanger is to cool the cabinet during the operation.The Heat Exchangers are mainly made of aluminium. The Heat Exchanger used with Nokia Citytalk is BHXA and the Heat Exchanger used with Nokia Extratalk is BHXB.
Figure 7. Nokia Citytalk/Extratalk Heat Exchanger The principal components of the Heat Exchanger are fans and a recuperator. There are two centrifugal
fans both in the BHXA and the BHXB. The BHXB includes an additional axial fan for the battery compartment cooling, thus the total number of fans in the BHXB is three. The Heat Exchangers used with Nokia Citytalk and Nokia Extratalk do not include a heater, because it is a part of the cabinet.
Figure 8. BHXA and BHXB The functions of the Heat Exchanger are controlled by the external Heat Control Unit (HCU). The normal power consumption in BHXA is less than 150W and even smaller in BHXB.
7.3. Air Conditioner

Nokia Citytalk+ and Nokia Extratalk+ cabinets are equipped with the Air Conditioner (AICA) instead of the Heat Exchanger. The function of the Air Conditioner is to cool the cabinet during operation. The Air Conditioner is a combined unit. It consists of a heat exchanger and an active cooler. The Air Conditioner unit is part of the cabinet assembly. The Air Conditioner contains an assembly plate for fixing the Air Conditioner to the cabinet and a cowling box which is used as a noise attenuator for the Air Conditioner. The functions of the Air Conditioner are controlled by the external Heat Control Unit (HCU). The Air Conditioner is the same for both Nokia Citytalk+ and Nokia Extratalk+. The only difference is the temperature setting. The internal temperature setting for Nokia Extratalk+ is lower than for Nokia Citytalk+ as the battery is located in the Extratalk+ cabinet.
Figure 9. The AICA and the Cowling Box
8. ACCESSORIES
The accessories available for Nokia Talk-family products are presented in Table 9, Table 10, Table 11 and Table 12. Table 9.
Product ACUE + Socket BTS Key GSM 1800 Lightning Protection Cables
Accessories Available for Nokia Flexitalk
GSM 900 Lightning Protection Cables ISCA Intelligent Shutdown Cable Smoke Detector STMP Portable Site Test Unit
Table 10. Accessories Available for Nokia Intratalk

Product HFPA Hard Plastic Feet ISLA ISDN Cable Kit LEKA Lift Eyes LNCA LNA Cable Kit MPMH Masthead Preamplifier Mounting Hardware RCKA RF Cable Kit Extension AFxx STHS Handset for Site Test Monitor Units
Table 11. Accessories Available for Nokia Citytalk

Product BTS Key CEKA Cable Entry Kit 1 CEKB Cable Entry Kit 2 CEKC Cable Entry Kit 3 CEKD Cable Entry Kit 4 CEKE Cable Entry Kit 5 CEKF 11 Cable Entry Kit 6 CEKG 11 Cable Entry Kit 7 ISCA Intelligent Shutdown Cable ISLA ISDN Cable Kit JMCA Antenna Feeder Jumper Cable Kit LEKA Lift Eyes LIFA Transportation Handle
LIPB GSM Lightning Protection Kit LIPD GSM 1800 Lightning Protection Kit LNCA LNA Cable Kit MFCA Jumper Cable Cover MPMH Masthead Preamplifier Mounting Hardware OHCA Horizontal Cable Kit RFSA DCS1800 RF Interface Splitter Installation Kit STHS Handset for Site Monitor Units TRKA Triangle Key
Table 12. Accessories Available for Nokia Extratalk

Product APUA Alarm Connection BBAD 75 Ah Batteries BBAD 100 Ah Batteries BTS Key CEKA Cable Entry Kit 1 CEKB Cable Entry Kit 2 CEKC Cable Entry Kit 3 CEKD Cable Entry Kit 4 CEKE Cable Entry Kit 5 CEKF 11 Cable Entry Kit 6 CEKG 11 Cable Entry Kit 7 DDMA Digital Dual Meter ICCD Interconnection Cable Set between Nokia Extratalk Cabinet and Nokia Citytalk Basic Cabinet ICCE Interconnection Cable Set between Nokia Extratalk Cabinet and Nokia Citytalk Extension Cabinet JUBA Power Junction Box AC/DC available available available available available available available available available available available available available Extension available available available available available available available available AC/AC available available available available available available available available available available available available available
available
available
JUBA Power Junction Box LEKA Lift Eyes LIFA Lifting Handle 4 MCKA Cable Entry Kit (0S + 24M) 3 MCKA + 1 SCKA Cable Entry Kit (16S + 18M) 2 MCKA + 2 SCKA Cable Entry Kit (32S + 12M) 1 MCKA + 3 SCKA Cable Entry Kit (48S + 6M) 4 SCKA Cable Entry Kit (64S ) OVPA AC/DC Overvoltage Protection Kit
available available -
available available available available
available available available -
available
available
available
available not needed since OVPA is in Extratalk AC/DC not needed since OVPB is in Extratalk AC/DC not needed since OVPC is in Extratalk AC/DC -
OVPB AC-feed Overvoltage Protection available Kit OVPC DC-feed Overvoltage Protection Kit OVPD AC/AC Overvoltage Protection Kit RCSA Residual Current Device for one power output available
available
available
RCSB Residual Current Device for two power output TRKA Triangle Key available
available
available
available
Nokia Talk-family BTS Software Description, B6Z 052489AE/6.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document introduces the software used in the Nokia Talk-family GSM 900, 1800 and 1900 (i.e. DE 34/DF 34/DG 35) Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs). Chapters 2 and 3 provide information on the BTS software and hardware databases. In chapter 4, all processor environments and their main functions are introduced. Then, in chapter 5, there is a short description of the BTS start-up procedure. Finally, in chapters 6 and 7, the interfaces and the structure of the BTS software are described on a general level. This document concentrates only on the software of the BTS units which is designed by Nokia Telecommunications. The software of the transmission units and the Man-Machine Interface Software (MMI SW) are not included in this document.
1.1. References
Refer to the following documents: [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Nokia Talk-family GSM 900, 1800 and 1900 BTS Man-Machine Interface User's Guide, B6Z 052596AE Nokia DG 35 Man Machine Interface User's Guide, D6Z 043646 Nokia Talk-Family and Nokia PrimeSite GSM 900 and 1800 BTS, BTS SW DF3.0 Installation at the BSC, B6Z 057923AE DG 35/46 BTS SW Release DF3.0 Updating BTS SW at the BSC/OMC, D6Z 043642AE Nokia Talk-Family and Nokia PrimeSite GSM 900 and 1800 BTS, Feature Descriptions, B6S 058646AE DG 35/46 BTS SW Release DF3.0 Feature Descriptions, D6Z 043640AE
2. BTS SOFTWARE
The Nokia Talk-family BTS software is delivered to the customer on 1.44 MB diskettes in both DOS and DX200 formats. DAT tapes are also available. The diskettes or the tape contain the current version of the BTS software released by Nokia Telecommunications. The BTS software release contains MMI SW and the following BTS software (the characters given in parentheses indicate the three first characters of the file names):
Master file (BTS)* BCF boot SW in two files (BB1 and BB2) BCF run-time SW (BUC) Channel DSP SW in two files (CDE and CDI) Configuration SW (CFG)* Equalizer DSP SW (EQD) TRX boot SW in two files (TB1 and TB2) TRX run-time SW (TUC) Frequency hopping SW in two files (FDE and FDI) STM SW (STM) RTC SW (RTC) * one file for normal A-bis and one for satellite A-bis (which is used for both the normal and satellite A-bis). GSM 1900 uses only the normal A-bis file.
The new software can be downloaded to Talk-family BTSs either locally with the MMI (refer to [1] or [2]) or remotely from the Base Station Controller (BSC) and the Network Management System (NMS). For more information on the software releases, refer to BTS SW Release documentation.
3. HARDWARE DATABASE MANAGEMENT

A hardware database (HW DB) is a file which contains BTS HW information on the configuration used. This chapter briefly describes HW database management. The default HW database is usually not applicable as such, therefore, the database has to be modified during commissioning. This is done with the menu-based HW Database Editor, MMIDATA. For detailed instructions on how to define HW database settings and how to load the HW database locally to the BTS flash (i.e. non-volatile) memory, refer to [1] or [2]. For information on how to load the HW database from the BSC, refer to [3] or [4]. During the BTS start-up, the BCF unit loads the HW database from the flash memory to RAM. After a connection between the BTS and the BSC has been established, the BSC sends a 'BTS_conf_data' message to the BTS. The parameters in that configuration data message replace the ones defined in the BTS HW database.
4. PROCESSORS AND THEIR MAIN FUNCTIONS
Figure 1. Processor Environments
4.1. BCF
There are two different processors in the Base Control Function (BCF) unit: i960 and the Frequency Hopping Digital Signalling Processor (FHDSP). The i960 processor is the master of the TS's Operation and Maintenance (O&M) functions. Its software controls and supervises the operation of all BTS units alone or in co-operation with other processors. The BCF does the following: Initializes and supervises the BCF unit hardware. Downloads the software and configuration information received from the BSC or the MMI to other processors. Supervises the HW of the units which do not have a processor mainly via External Alarm and Control (EAC) lines. Supervises the transmission units via the Q1 interface. Supervises the software and HW of the units which have a processor by regularly polling the slave processors. Delivers all status information to the BSC and the MMI. Manages BTS O&M signalling Supervises and adjusts the MCLG (Master Clock Generator)
The Digital Signalling Processor (DSP) that is located in the BCF controls the frequency hopping functions of the BTS. This FHDSP acts as a master of the frequency hopping bus which connects the BCF to the Transceivers (TRXs) and the Transceivers together.
4.2. TRX
The TRX unit contains seven processors: one I960, two CHDSPs (Channel DSPs) and four EQDSPs (Equalizer DSPs). The functions of the i960 processor can be divided into two categories: O&M and telecommunication control. The O&M software is the master of each TRX's functions. Its functions are very similar to those of the BCF, but the TRX's O&M operates on a TRX level. The TRX O&M: Initializes and supervises the TRX HW. Downloads the software and configuration information received from the BCF to its slave processors (DSPs). Supervises DSP software functions by regularly polling the DSP processors. Transfers the TRX status information to the BCF.
The TRX's telecom software takes care of the signalling procedures required in telecommunication scenarios, such as: Call set-up and release. Handovers. TX power control. Air-interface measurements. Short messages.
Two CHDSP processors are allocated mainly to take care of: channel encoding and decoding, ciphering and deciphering of signalling messages transferred between the TRX i960 and a Mobile Station (MS), speech and data blocks transferred between a remote transcoder and an MS.
The CHDSPs are divided on a timeslot basis so that one CHDSP handles the even and the other CHDSP the odd radio timeslots. Both CHDSPs take care of four traffic timeslots. The EQDSPs operate only in uplink direction. Their main function is to equalize the signal received from the Air interface via the Radio Frequency (RF) units and, in the case of antenna diversity, combine the diversity signal before the received signal is delivered to the CHDSPs. Each EQDSP handles the traffic of two Air-interface timeslots. Half Rate Speech Coding The TRX is capable of supporting dynamically both Full Rate and Half Rate coding. Each radio timeslot can be configured either as Full Rate or Half Rate traffic channel on a call basis by channel allocation from the BSC. Note: Not available in US, yet. No MSs available for Half Rate.
Enhanced Full Rate Codec The Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) codec feature introduces a new full rate coder to the BSS, called EFR coder. The coder uses the existing GSM 900/GSM 1800 full rate channel coding but provides a considerably better performance in all channel conditions. For detailed information on this feature, refer to [5] or [6].
4.3. RTC
The Remote Tune Combiner (RTC) unit contains one i80186 processor. The RTC software controls and supervises the functions of the RTC unit according to the commands and configuration information received from the BCF. The RTC unit: initializes and supervises the RTC HW, delivers RTC status information to the BCF, executes antenna measurements.
Note: Nokia Talk-family GSM 1900 BTSs do not use RTCs.
4.4. STM
The Site Test Monitor (STM) unit contains one i80186 processor. The STM software controls and supervises the functions of the STM unit according to the commands and configuration information received from the BCF. The STM unit: initializes and supervises the STM HW, delivers STM status information to the BCF, controls various switches and tests the MS in certain BTS self-tests (for example, the STM loop test and RX antenna measurement).
Note: Not available for Nokia Talk-family GSM 1900 BTS.
5. BTS START-UP PROCEDURE

All Talk-family BTS units that contain one or more processors start up basically in the same way. First they perform self-tests with the boot software stored in the units' non-volatile memory. During the self-tests, there is no communication between the units in the BTS. After the BCF has successfully executed its self-tests, it establishes a link connection to the BSC via the transmission unit. The BTS software is downloaded from the BSC to the BCF via the O&M link. If the BCF already has all the necessary software in its non-volatile memory, it is not necessary to reload the software to the BCF. The software can be downloaded also from the MMI.
Having received the software from the BSC, the BCF initializes its own HW environment, establishes a link connection to the other units of the BTS and receives their self-test reports. In the case when there are no active alarms, the BCF checks the versions of the software in each slave unit and, if needed, loads the new software and the necessary configuration information to the slave units. When the TRXs have all the required software and configuration parameters, they establish a telecom link to the BSC and receive the Air interface parameters to start Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) transmission and normal telecom service.
6. INTERFACES
6.1. A-bis interface
The A-bis interface can be logically divided into three sections: O&M link between the BSC and BCF i960 software. Telecom link between the BSC and TRX i960 software. Connection between a transcoder unit and TRX CHDSP software.
There is an O&M link (16 kbit/s or 64 kbit/s) between the BSC and the BTS. All O&M type of BTS information is delivered via this link. There is no direct O&M communication between the TRXs and the BSC. Traffic in the O&M link is only partially based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) recommendations. For the most part it is a Nokia-specific interface. Telecom links are built on a TRX basis. The BTS software supports the 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s or 64 kbit/s A-bis signalling. The number of the telecom links between the BTS and the BSC is equal to the number of TRXs in the BTS. When the link establishment is allowed, the TRX communicates quite independently directly with the BSC. Traffic in the telecom link is implemented according to the GSM recommendations. With Half Rate TRXs, the telecom signalling speed can be either 32 kbit/s or 64 kbit/s. Both CHDSPs communicate directly with transcoders. Only the information on the required traffic type is received from the TRX i960 but communication itself is quite independent. Traffic between a transcoder and the BTS is implemented according to the GSM recommendations.
6.2. Air interface

Communication with the MSs is handled by TRX units. Two different kinds of traffic are transferred between the TRX and the MS: signalling and speech/data. Signalling between the MS and the TRX i960 software is required for telecom operations, such as call set-up and release, and it is very closely tied to telecom link traffic in the A-bis interface. The actual communication is carried out between the MS and the BSC or even the Mobile Services Switching
Centre (MSC) via the BTS. Speech/data traffic is transferred from the A-bis interface via the CHDSPs to the MS and vice versa.
7. PROTOCOL LAYERS
All communication between the control processors (all processors excluding the DSP processors) cross external and internal interfaces is built on the Open System Interconnection Model (OSI) to have several protocol layers which have counterparts on both sides of the interface. Three layers can be found in the BTS software (see figure below). Their functions are described in the following sections.
Figure 2. Signaling Protocols in BSS
7.1. Layer 1 (L1)

Layer 1 (physical layer) includes all the software that is needed to transfer upper layer data packages via the physical media. For instance, in the Air interface the following items can be categorised to be part of layer 1 from the software point of view: The TRX i960 software creating the interface between the HW and the software of the upper layers (L2 and L3). The TRX i960 software creating the interface between the DSP software and the software of the upper layers (L2 and L3). All CHDSP and EQDSP software. Functions of the RF units.
7.2. Layer 2 (L2)

Layer 2 (link layer) contains the software which: supervises the status of layer 1, makes sure that all layer 3 messages delivered through the link are transferred correctly (layer 2 takes care of the possible retransmissions).
In the Air interface, layer 2 is called Link Access Protocol on the Dm-channel (LAPDm) and in the A-bis interface, Link Access Protocol on the D-channel (LAPD).
7.3. Layer 3 (L3)

Layer 3 is the highest BTS software layer. The features and functions of the processors described in the earlier chapters are implemented mostly by layer 3 software. On the telecom side, layer 3 takes care of the signalling procedures, such as call set-up and release, while on the O&M side, layer 3 takes care of software downloading, BTS initialization and alarm handling.
Nokia Talk-family BTS Guide to Customer Documentation, B6Z 052588AE/7.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the structure and version control system of Nokia Talk-family BTS customer documentation. The customer documentation consists of User Manuals, Product Descriptions Manual, Software Release Manuals, and Technical Notes.
1.1. Ordering a User Manual

To order a manual, place in the order to the closest Nokia sales office. The customer documentation is provided in paper or electronic format (CD ROM) according to the order.
1.2. Feedback Request

We welcome our customers' contribution in improving our customer documentation. The manuals contain a feedback form: please use it to report your comments and to suggest improvements.
2. CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION
2.1. User Manuals
The User Manuals give general instructions, not site-specific material such as site layout drawings for the site: such documents are provided by the customer projects. Each Nokia Talk-family product has a separate User Manual. The user manuals contain product specific instructions for the following: installation commissioning integration (in BTS manuals) maintenance
Each User Manual includes a warnings and cautions document as well as a reference guide for using the BTS user interface (MMI). Table 1. Contents of User Manual Documents
Document Table of Contents General
Description of Contents Lists the documents (name, code, and version). Details the warnings and cautions which must be followed when handling and using the equipment. The description of the documentation and the Glossary are also included here. Instructions for installing the equipment to the site. Instructions for initialising and setting the equipment and executing the commissioning tests. This document is used together with the MMI documentation. Instructions for making test calls to verify that the equipment operates in the network. Instructions for periodical and corrective maintenance measures and procedures for software (SW) and hardware (HW) updates. The documents in this section are used together with the MMI documentation. Commands and tasks available for the user via the MMI; supplements the commissioning and the maintenance instructions; HW Info Editor User's Guide.
Installation Commissioning
Integration
Maintenance
MMI
2.2. Product Descriptions

The Product Descriptions manual contains detailed functional level information about the Nokia Talk-family system, cabinet types, plug-in units and SW. Depending on the product type and configuration, some descriptions may be superfluous, as all units are not included in every configuration. The documents are arranged in the manual in the following order: 1. 2. 3. Product description and software description Documentation Unit descriptions in an alphabetical order according to the unit abbreviation
Table 2 details the contents of the Product Description manual. Table 2.

Document Table of Contents
Contents of Product Descriptions Manual

Description of Contents Lists the description documents in the Product Descriptions manual: document name, code and version. Describes the Nokia Talk-family system. Describes the BTS software. Description of documentation and Glossary.
General Documentation
Unit Descriptions
The plug-in unit descriptions discuss the main features and operation of the units.
2.3. Software Release Manuals

The regularly issued Software Release manuals contain the latest SW versions on diskettes and the relevant information concerning new features, compatibility, SW tests, and SW updating instructions.
2.4. Technical Notes

Technical Notes are used to inform the customers of various issues concerning the Nokia Talk-family products. Technical Notes may, for example, contain instructions, notices of changes in the products or the production systems, corrections, or they may include documents on new products.
3. TYPING AND MARKING CONVENTIONS

This chapter details the typing and marking conventions used in the Nokia Talk-family customer documentation.
3.1. Icons
The warnings, cautions, recommendations, notes, and procedures are marked in the following manner: Warning: The warning icon is used to alert the user to dangers which may cause ill health, physical injury or loss of life. Caution: The caution icon is used to alert the user to possible damage to equipment. Recommendation: The recommendation icon is used to mark a recommendation for more effective operation. Note: The note icon is used to emphasize a significant issue. The beginning of a procedure is marked with an arrow icon on the left margin of the page. In the electronic version the beginning of a procedure is marked in bold type.
3.2. Typing Conventions

Commands which are typed in by the user are presented as follows: Keyed-in Command
Messages and display texts are presented as follows: Displayed Text
3.3. Figure Markings

All figures are coded for internal purposes. To avoid confusion with text embedded in figures, the figure code is presented inside a frame.
4. IDENTIFICATION AND VERSION CONTROL

For identification and version control purposes, all products and all documents delivered to customers are coded according to specific principles.
4.1. User Manuals

Each manual has an individual code number. This code number and the manual version number are printed on the back label of the paper manual. In the electronic format, the version number and the code number are shown on the label, in the format '466960A.101'.
Figure 1. Binder Back Label
The three-digit number following the manual code shows the version of the manual. The first digit in the version number (101) shows a version change, whereas the two last digits show a minor modification. Modifications, for example changes in the binder type or the number of tabs, usually coincide with the manual update. Both are always upgraded when the manual version changes as follows: 1st version 2nd version 465264A.101 465264A.202 465264A.203
2nd version with modification 3rd version 465264A.304
The version number of the manual is also given in writing. For example, '465695A.504 Version 5' is the fifth issue of the Nokia Citytalk DE 34/DF 34 GSM 900/GSM 1800 User Manual. The binder code number is the order code of the manual. Only complete manuals are available for order.
4.2. Table of Contents

The Table of Contents shows the name, code, and version of the manual and details all the documents (names, codes, and versions) in that manual issue. A space is reserved for the customer for marking the update of the binder. Changes compared to the previous manual version, such as completely new documents, are summarised at the end of the Table of Contents. The version number of a changed document is underlined. The CE marking is also shown in the Table of Contents. The Table of Contents is shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2. Table of Contents
4.3. Documents
The customer documents are identified by their unique document codes in the footer of every page in the document. These codes correspond to the document codes given in the Table of Contents. The document code has the following structure: NTC Nokia Telecommunications Unique document code
B6Z 052588AE 7.0.0
Document version number
5. UPDATING THE CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION BINDERS

5.1. Complete Update
When a binder is completely updated, all the user has to do is to replace the old manual version with the new one. This is the normal update procedure.
5.2. Partial Update

Partial update is used in urgent situations only. An update package contains the following: update note with instructions new Table of Contents new binder label updated documents new documents, if issued.
With each update, the version number of the binder changes. It is the responsibility of the customer to replace the old documents with the new versions in the binders and to take the old copies out of circulation. Update the manual as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the binder label. Cut out and insert the new label into the spine of the binder. Remove the old Table of Contents and insert the new one. Remove the outdated versions one by one and replace them with the new versions. Insert new documents, if any, in the places indicated by the Table of Contents. When all documents from the update package are in the binder, mark the date of the update and your initials in the space reserved for the customer in the Table of Contents. Dispose of the outdated documents.
Nokia Talk-family BTS Glossary , B6Z 052589AE/9.0.0

1. GLOSSARY
1.1. A
A-bis 2 Mbit/s interface between BTS and BSC AC Alternating Current ACUA AC Connection Unit, version A used in Nokia Extratalk AC/DC cabinet ACUC AC Connection Unit, version C used in Nokia Extratalk AC/AC cabinet ACUD UL-approved AC Connection Unit, used in Nokia Extratalk AC/DC cabinet, GSM 1900 applications ACUE AC Power Distribution Unit for Nokia Flexitalk A/D Analog to Digital conversion AFE Antenna Filter Extension Unit; versions A: RX: 880 ... 915 MHz; TX: 925 ... 960 MHz B: RX: 1710 ... 1785 MHz; TX: 1805 ... 1880 MHz D: RX: 888 ... 910 MHz; TX: 925 ... 960 MHz L: RX: 1850....1909MHz; TX: 1930 ....1989MHz H: RX: 898 ... 915 MHz; TX: 925 ... 960 MHz J: RX: 890 ... 915 MHz; TX: 925 ... 960 MHz M: RX: 880 ... 915 MHz; TX: 925 ... 960 MHz N: RX: 891 ... 912.5 MHz; TX: 925 ... 960 MHz AFH Antenna Filter High-Power Unit. Filters both uplink and downlink, amplifies uplink. Versions A: for E-GSM 900 RF Band, including both primary band (P-GSM 900) and the extension band
(G1) J: for the Primary band (P-GSM 900) B: for GSM 1800 L: for GSM 1900 AFT Antenna Filter Twin Unit; versions B: RX 1710.....1785 MHz; TX: 1805 .... 1880 MHz L: RX: 1850... 1909 MHz; TX: 1930...1989 MHz AGC Automatic Gain Control AGND Analog Ground AICA Air Conditioner for Nokia Citytalk+ and Extratalk+ AIS Alarm Indication Signal Alarm Announcement given to the operating personnel about abnormal function of the system or about a failure, or an indication of the degradation of the service level or performance Alarm Status The current status of the system; indicates what alarms are active, if any ALM Alarm; LED indication ANSI American National Standards Institute ANT Antenna Antenna gain Amplification of the TX and RX signal by providing a narrower beam of radiation. Provides power voltage and communication between the units in the BTS. Antenna supervision Monitoring VSWR of the antenna. APUA Alarm Connection unit, version A
ARFN Absolute Radio Frequency Number ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
1.2. B
Band-pass filtering Filtering out unwanted signals and passing wanted signals. BB Baseband BBA Battery Module, versions D: 75 Ah F: 100 Ah BBM Baseband Module BBSS Baseband Subsystem BBU Battery Backup BBUC Redundant Battery Backup Unit, version C used in Nokia Extratalk AC/DC cabinet BBUE Battery Backup Unit, version E used in Nokia Extratalk AC/AC cabinet BCCH Broadcast Control Channel BCFA Base Control Function Unit, version A BCFSIG BCF Signalling Channel BCFSW BCF Software License
BeO Beryllium Oxide BER Bit Error Ratio BHXA Heat Exchanger for Nokia Citytalk GSM 900/GSM 1800/GSM 1900 BTS Basic and Extension cabinet BHXB Heat Exchanger for Nokia Extratalk GSM 900/GSM 1800/GSM 1900 cabinet Bias feed Source of DC power for the Bias Tee Bias Tee Provides DC injection/tap-off for LNA power feed and lightning protection. Bit/s Bits per second Booster configuration A configuration using TBU, AFH, TRX and MHA that provides same geographic coverage with fewer Base Stations. BS Base Station BSS Base Station System BSC Base Station Controller BTS Base Transceiver Station
1.3. C
CABA Nokia Flexitalk GSM 900/GSM 1800 Mini BTS cabinet CABC Nokia Intratalk GSM 900/GSM 1800/GSM 1900 BTS Basic cabinet
CABD Nokia Intratalk GSM 900/GSM 1800/GSM 1900 BTS Extension cabinet CABG Nokia Citytalk GSM 900/GSM 1800/GSM 1900 BTS Basic cabinet CABH Nokia Citytalk GSM 900/GSM 1800/GSM 1900 BTS Extension cabinet CABI Nokia Extratalk GSM 900/GSM 1800/GSM 1900 AC/DC cabinet CABJ Nokia Extratalk GSM 900/GSM 1800/GSM 1900 Extension cabinet CABO Nokia Flexitalk GSM 900/GSM 1800 Outdoor Mini Cabinet CABK Nokia Extratalk GSM 900/GSM 1800 AC/AC cabinet CBCH Cell Broadcast Channel CCCH Common Control Channel CCF Cabinet Cooling Fan Unit; versions A: for Nokia Intratalk BTS cabinet and Nokia Citytalk BTS cabinet C: for Nokia Flexitalk Mini BTS cabinet CCITT Comit Consultatif International Tlegraphique et Tlephonique (now known as ITU-T) CEK Cable Entry Kit, versions A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H Cell The coverage area of a given BTS where the transmission is acceptably receivable Cellular Network Radio network the operation of which is based on BTS specific coverage areas CH Channel
Chain Connection Transmission solution where the BTSs are interconnected through a chain (the first BTS in the chain is connected to the BSC); see Multidrop Connection, Loop Connection, Point-to-Point Connection. CHDSP Channel DSP COBA Cowling Box for the Nokia Citytalk+ Basic and Extension cabinets COBB Cowling Box for the Nokia Extratalk+ cabinet Commissioning Tasks performed to enable the BTS to be connected to the network; including operational tests and configuration of the transmission equipment. Coverage Area see Cell CPM Continuous Phase Modulation CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check CS Customer Services CSU Common Power Supply unit; versions A: -48/-60 VDC B: 230 VAC CTRL Control CU Carrier Unit
1.4. D
D/A Digital to Analog conversion dB
Decibel D-bus Data (D1) and control (D2) bus between units DC Direct Current DCCH Dedicated Control Channel DCU DC Connection Unit, versions A, B, and C DDMA Digital Dual Meter for Nokia Extratalk cabinets DE 34 Talk-family Nokia BTS for GSM 900 DF 34 Talk-family Nokia BTS for GSM 1800 DFC Cable set for DIFA; versions A: for Nokia Intratalk cabinets B: for Nokia Citytalk and Citytalk+ cabinets DG 35 Talk-family Nokia BTS for GSM 1900 DGND Digital Ground DIFA Diversity Antenna Isolation Filter DIP Dual in Parallel DIV Diversity DMF Digital Multiplexing Optical Line Equipment DMR
Nokia Digital Microwave Radio DN2 2 Mbit/s Dynamic Node Downlink The direction of transmission in which the BTS is the transmitting facility and the mobile station is the receiving facility. DPRAM Dual Port RAM DRAM Dynamic RAM DSP Digital Signal Processing DTRX Dummy Transceiver DTX Discontinuous Transmission Dual Band GSM 900/GSM 1800 configuration under a single BCF in Nokia Citytalk or Intratalk Basic or Basic + Extension cabinets. Dual Duplex operation Setup of two duplexed antennas used to transmit and receive for one cell. Duplex-filter A pair of filters which enables the transmitter and receiver to share the same antenna without the transmitter interfering with the receiver.
1.5. E
EAC External Alarms and Controls Earthing Protecting the equipment and the users against lightning and surges through the external connections EELA Nokia Extratalk Extension cabinet link cover EEPROM
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Device ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute EXT External or Extension
1.6. F
FACCH Fast Associated Control Channel FASA Filter assembly for Nokia Flexitalk Mini Indoor BTS cabinet F-bus The BTS bus used for frequency hopping FCAA AFE Front Cable Set FCAC Dual Duplexing Cable Set FCB Booster Cable Set; versions A: GSM 900 B: GSM 1800/GSM 1900 FCCH Frequency Correction Channel FCFA FTS front cable set
FTS front cable set FCLK Frame Clock FCRB RTC Front Cable Set for Nokia Intratalk BTS, 6 TX cables FCRD RTC Front Cable Set for Nokia Citytalk BTS, 6 TX cables FCRE RMU Front Cable Set; 12 RX cables FER Frame Erasure Ratio FHBC Frequency Hopping Bus Controller Flash (memory) Memory technology; acts as non-volatile RAM FLT Fault; LED indication FN Frame Number FTS Floating Transceiver Switch: A = GSM 900, B = GSM 1800 FW Firmware
1.7. G
GFRA Grounding Frame GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying GND Ground GSM
Groupe Spciale Mobile/ Global System for Mobile communications GSM 900 900 MHz variant of GSM GSM 1800 1800 MHz variant of GSM GSM 1900 1900 MHz variant of GSM Guard Channel Edges of a specified band of RF. RF signal in guard channels has higher probablility of leakage out of alotted channels, thus loss of signal.
1.8. H
Handover Action of switching a call in progress from one radio channel to another to secure the continuity of an established call. HCU Heat Control Unit; versions A: DC B: AC HDB3 High Density Bipolar of order 3 HLR Home Location Register HPFA Hard plastic foot for Nokia Intratalk cabinet HRMA Heat management removal aid HRU Heater Kit; versions B: Heater Kit HRUB (AC) C: Heater Kit HRUC (AC) Hybrid combiner A device that combines two TX or RX signals on one RF path.
A device that combines two TX or RX signals on one RF path. HW Hardware
1.9. I
ICC Interconnection Cable Set, versions: D: for Citytalk Basic - Extratalk AC/DC cabinets E: for Citytalk Extension - Extratalk AC/DC cabinets G: for Citytalk Basic - Extratalk AC/AC cabinets H: for Citytalk Extension - Extratalk AC/AC cabinets ICE Nokia Intelligent Coverage Enhancement feature. Combines greater coverage and higher capacity for more phone calls. ID Identification IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IF Intermediate Frequency; Interface IFU Intermediate Frequency Unit IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity In-building coverage From a position outside of a building, the BTS is able to provide RF coverage for the interior of the building. Installation Tasks performed to mount the BTS at the site; include fitting the units and connecting the cabling. Integration Tasks performed to connect the BTS to the cellular network; include the test calls. ISCA Intelligent Shutdown Cable ISDN
ISDN Integrated Services Data Network ISLA ISDN Cable Kit I, Q Inphase and Quadrature components of a modulated signal
1.10. J
JMCA Antenna Jumper Cable Kit JUBA Junction Box; an option used with Nokia Extratalk GSM 900/GSM 1800 AC/AC cabinet
1.11. L
L1, L2, L3 Layers of ISO/OSI Model LAPD Link Access Protocol on the D-channel LAPDm Link Access Protocol on the D-channel, modified LEKA Lifting Eye Bolt Kit (M12) LED Light Emitting Diode LIFA Transportation Handle LIP Lightning protection, versions: A: for Nokia Flexitalk GSM 900 Mini BTS cabinet, cables left B: for Nokia Citytalk GSM 900 BTS cabinet C: for Nokia Flexitalk GSM 900 Mini BTS, cables right D: for Nokia Citytalk GSM 1800 BTS cabinet E: for Nokia Flexitalk GSM 1800 BTS cabinet, cables left F: for Nokia Flexitalk GSM 1800 BTS cabinet, cables right
G: for Nokia Flexitalk GSM 900 BTS cabinet, cables down H: for Nokia Flexitalk GSM 1800 BTS cabinet, cables down LNA Low Noise Amplifier LNCA LNA Cable Kit Loopback signal A signal that verifies that transmitted data in the TRX is accurate. Loop Connection Transmission solution where the BTSs are interconnected through a loop; see Chain Connection, Multidrop Connection, Point-to-Point Connection. LTE Line Terminal Equipment
1.12. M
MB Megabyte MCB Mini Circuit Breaker MCLG Master Clock Generator MFCA Jumper cable cover MFPA Floor Mounting Plinth for Nokia Flexitalk Mini Indoor BTS MFPB Floor Mounting Plinth for Nokia Flexitalk+ Mini Outdoor BTS MFPC Office Plinth Cabinet for Nokia Flexitalk Mini Indoor BTS MHA Masthead Amplifier MHP
Masthead Preamplifier; versions A: 880 ... 915 MHz B: 880 ... 915 MHz D: 898 ... 911 MHz MMI Man-Machine Interface MML Man-Machine Language MOEA DC Heat Exchanger for Nokia Flexitalk Mini Outdoor BTS MOEB AC Heat Exchanger for Nokia Flexitalk+ Mini Outdoor BTS MPMH MHP Mounting Hardware MPRA Plinth rack assembly for Nokia Flexitalk cabinet MS Mobile Station; typically a mobile telephone MSC Mobile Switching Center MTBF Mean Time Between Failures Multidrop Connection Transmission solution where two or more BTSs share one 2 Mbit/s PCM line; see Chain Connection , Loop Connection, Point-to-Point Connection. MWBA Wall-mounting bracket for Nokia Flexitalk Mini Indoor BTS MWBB Wall-mounting bracket for Nokia Flexitalk+ Mini Outdoor BTS MWU Microwave Unit
1.13. N
ND Nokia Digital Transmission Equipment Network Element Any equipment belonging to the telecommunications environment which can be managed, monitored or controlled in a telecommunications network. Network Topology The manner in which the transmission between the cells of the network is handled; loop, chain, multidrop and point-to-point connections. NMS Network Management System Nokia Flexitalk Mini Indoor GSM 900/GSM 1800 BTS Nokia Flexitalk+ Mini Outdoor GSM 900/GSM 1800 BTS Nokia Intratalk GSM 900/GSM 1800/GSM1900 Indoor BTS; consists of a Basic cabinet, or a Basic and an Extension cabinet Nokia Citytalk GSM 900/GSM 1800/GSM1900 Outdoor BTS; consists of a Basic cabinet, or a Basic and an Extension cabinet equipped with a heat exchanger Nokia Citytalk+ All-Climate outdoor GSM 900/GSM 1800/GSM1900 BTS; consists of a Basic cabinet, or a Basic and an Extension cabinet equipped with an air conditioner Nokia Extratalk Versions Extratalk AC/DC, Extratalk Extension and Extratalk AC/AC; equipped with a heat exchanger (AC/AC not available for GSM 1900). Nokia Extratalk+ All-Climate; versions Extratalk AC/DC, Extratalk Extension and Extratalk AC/AC; equipped with an air conditioner (AC/AC not available for GSM 1900). NTC Nokia Telecommunications
1.14. O
O&M Operation and Maintenance OCXO Oven-Controlled Crystal Oscillator ODPB Double plinth for Nokia Citytalk BTS cabinet and Nokia Extratalk cabinet ODRP Double roof for Nokia Citytalk BTS cabinet and Nokia Extratalk cabinet OHCA Horizontal (parallel) Cable Kit Omnidirectional Cell Cell, also known as standard cell, with a 360 sector; cf. Sectored Cell OPAA DC power adapter cable set for AC-feed in Nokia Citytalk cabinet Operator Telecommunications authority running telecommunications services in a geographical area OPR Operating; LED indication OSI Open Systems Interconnection Model OSPB Single plinth for Nokia Citytalk BTS cabinet or Nokia Extratalk cabinet OSRB Single roof for Nokia Citytalk BTS cabinet and Nokia Extratalk cabinet OVP Overvoltage Protector Kit, versions A, B, C: options used with Nokia Extratalk GSM 900/GSM 1800 AC/DC cabinet D: an option used with Nokia Extratalk GSM 900/GSM 1800 AC/AC cabinet
1.15. P
PC Personal Computer
PCM Pulse Code Modulation PCM timeslot 2 Mbit/s PCM circuit divided into 32 64 kbit/s timeslots or 1.5 Mbit/s PCM circuit divided into 24 64 kbit/s timeslot Pf Power (forward) PIFA Plinth Interface Plate for Nokia Flexitalk+ Mini Outdoor BTS PIN Personal Identification Number Plug-in unit A unit that slides into the BTS subrack and connects to the backplane. Point-to-Point Connection Transmission solution where one 2 Mbit/s PCM line is reserved for a single BTS; see Chain Connection, Loop Connection, Multidrop Connection. ppm parts per million Pr Power (reflected) PSPDN Packet Switched Public Data Network PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network PSU TRX Power Supply Unit; versions A: -48/-60 VDC B: 230 VAC
1.16. Q
Q1-bus BTS Control bus
1.17. R
Radio Relay Device which replaces a fixed cable in an A-bis line RAM Random Access Memory RAX RX Antenna Test RBER Residual Bit Error Ratio RCD Residual Current Device RCS Residual Current Device Kit, versions A and B; an option used with Nokia Extratalk GSM 900/GSM 1800 AC/AC cabinet RES Radio Equipment Systems RF Radio Frequency RFSS RF Subsystem RMU Receiver Multicoupler Unit; versions A: GSM 900: RX: 880 ... 915 MHz; TX: 925 ... 960 MHz B: GSM 1800: RX: 1710 ... 1785 MHz; TX: 1805 ... 1880 MHz H: GSM 900: RX: 898 ... 915 MHz; TX: 925 ... 960 MHz J: GSM 900: RX: 890 ... 915 MHz; TX: 925 ... 960 MHz ROM Read-Only Memory RR Radio Resources RRI Radio Relay Interface (Indoor Unit of DMR 18-38I)
RRM Radio Relay Module (integrated); consists of RRI and RRO RRO Radio Relay Outdoor Unit (in DMR 18-38S) RSK Splitter Kit; versions A: for Nokia Intratalk B: for Nokia Citytalk RSS Received Signal Strength RSSI Relative Signal Strength Indicator (value) RST Reset RTC Remote Tune Combiner; versions C: 6 TRX (GSM 900) F: 6 TRX (GSM 1800) RX Receiver
1.18. S
SACCH Slow Associated Control Channel SCH Synchronization Channel SDCCH Stand-Alone Dedicated Control Channel SDKA Smoke detector for Nokia Flexitalk Sector See Cell Sectored BTS Site
Site with multiple cells positioned to supply the desired radiation the maximum number of cells in a sectored BTS site being six; see Sectored Cell Sectored Cell Cell with a conic coverage area achieved by means of a directional antenna; cf. Omnidirectional Cell , Sectored BTS Site SIFA Rectifier System Interface Unit, version A SIM Subscriber Identification Module Single Sector BTS where the physical equipment serves a single cell in the network radio topology Site Specific installation location of a given BTS SMAL 50 Ohm Dummy Load S/N Signal-to-Noise Ratio Software Package Software collection consisting of the application files of the BTS operating system SRAM Static RAM ST Service Terminal STE Service Terminal Emulator STHS Handset for Site Test Monitor Units STM Site Test Monitor Unit; versions D: GSM 900 E: GSM 1800 P: Portable STM STMSW
STW Software License SYNC Synchronization SW Software SWR Standing Wave Ratio
1.19. T
T Standard measurement unit of mechanics; 5.08 mm TABA T1 A-bis Adapter Kit Unit TBU Transmitter Booster Unit. Boosts downlink; versions A: for GSM 900 B: for GSM 1800 L: for GSM 1900 TCH Traffic Channel TCH/F Traffic Channel/Full Rate TDMA Time Division Multiple Access Test directional coupler In the AFH and the TBU, used to measure VSWR and power output. TRAU Transcoder/Rate Adapter Unit TRKA Triangle Key TRSS Transmission Subsystem
TRU Base Station Transmission Unit, versions A: for E1 C: for HDSL E: for T1 G: for ISDN TRX Transceiver Unit, transmits and receives RF signal. A: GSM 900 D: GSM 1800 E: GSM 1900 TRXSIG TRX Signalling Channel TRXSW TRX Software License TS Timeslot TX Transmitter
1.20. U
U Standard measurement unit of mechanics; 44.45 mm UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter UL Underwriters Laboratories Uplink The direction of transmission in which the mobile station is the transmitting facility and the BTS is the receiving facility Uplink Diversity The BTS uses two antennas and two receivers simultaneously on a single channel to obtain improved overall sensitivity in a system which is subject to random fading
1.21. V
VAC Volts, AC VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator VDC Volts, DC VLR Visitor Location Register VSWR Voltage Standing-Wave Ratio. Ratio between transmitted power and reflected power.
AC Connection Unit ACU, B6Z 465797AE/4.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main functions, features, and the interfaces of AC Connection Unit (ACU). The ACU is an electrical distribution unit used in Nokia Extratalk cabinets. It feeds AC and DC power to the Nokia Extratalk and BTS cabinets and also functions as an EMC protection for conductive disturbances to and from the Nokia Extratalk cabinet. The unit has a main switch that controls all AC feed to the cabinet. A wall socket with required RCD/MCB protection is provided for maintenance purposes. The external AC feed runs through AC filters into the cabinet as power supply for the rectifiers and the heater. -48 VDC is then provided by the rectifiers, for example, for DC current feeding to the Base Transceiver Station (BTS). The -48 VDC comes out from the cabinet through a filter. Optional overvoltage protection is provided. The ACU is a solid part of the cabinet. There are five basic types of electrical components in the ACU: terminal blocks, sockets, filters, protecting components and the main switch.
Figure 1. ACU Block Diagram
2. ACUA
2.1. Front View

The ACUA has the following components on the front panel: AC main switch Residual Current Breaker (RCD) 30 mA for AC output Customer-specific maintenance socket for 230/208/240 VAC output (PE, N, and L1 poles, line type 16 A).
The AC main switch controls all AC feed to the Nokia Extratalk cabinet. The switch can be locked in the OFF position.
Figure 2. ACUA Front Side
2.2. Terminal Blocks

The ACUA has three terminal blocks and one fuse block on the top. The first terminal block on the left includes AC input connections and optional overvoltage protection. The second and third terminal blocks are for AC and DC output connections. AC connections from the Nokia Extratalk cabinet are led through the 2-pole fuse block. DC connections from the Nokia Extratalk cabinet are led through the 1-pole fuse block.
Figure 3. Top View of ACUA Table 1.

Direction from ACUA to BTS Basic cabinet from ACUA to BTS Extension cabinet from ACUA to Extratalk Extension cabinet from ACUA to BTS Basic cabinet from ACUA to BTS Extension cabinet from ACUA to Extratalk Extension cabinet
Connections from Terminal Block

Line Type 230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC -48 VDC -48 VDC -48 VDC
2.3. Wall Sockets

The ACUA has the following connectors at the rear: four sockets for AC output DC connector.
Figure 4. ACUA Rear View Table 2.

Socket No. S 101 S 18 S 15 S 12 S 113
ACUA Connections
Socket Type 3-pole wall socket 3-pole wall socket 3-pole wall socket 3-pole wall socket 2-pole DC socket Direction from ACUA to Heater / Cooler from ACUA to Rectifier 3 from ACUA to Rectifier 2 from ACUA to Rectifier 1 from DCUA to ACUA Line Type 230 VAC/16 A 230 VAC/10 A 230 VAC/10 A 230 VAC/10 A -48 VDC/100 A
3. ACUC
3.1. Operation
The 230/400 VAC is supplied by the customer and it runs through the 3-phase main switch into the following outputs: 230 VAC from phase L1 goes through an off-line type UPS device, service switch, AC filter and fuses to the AC outputs with backup. This phase is divided just before a load release relay and 230 VAC also goes through AC filter and fuse to internal output 1 (heat control unit). 230 VAC from phase L2 goes through AC filters and fuses to internal output 2 (heater/cooler) and to the customer-specific maintenance socket. 230 VAC from phase L3 goes through fuses to external outputs (without backup). -48 VDC is provided by the off-line type UPS device when there is no mains breakdown situation. The -48 VDC is routed through the DCUC unit to the ACUC. During mains breakdown, AC and DC current will be taken from the batteries. The UPS device inverts the DC voltage to AC voltage. The -48 VDC is routed through the DCUC and it comes into the ACUC through a DC filter. The AC outputs with backup can be switched off by load release relay using the Intelligent Shut Down Procedure. The controls and alarms from the ACUC to the system go through a 9-pin D-connector.
Figure 5. ACUC Block Diagram
3.2. Front View

The ACUC has the following components on the front panel: AC main switch Residual Circuit Breaker (2-pole, 25A/30mA) for AC output socket Customer-specific maintenance AC socket output Service switch
The main switch controls all AC feed (3-phase) to the Nokia Extratalk cabinet and the AC outputs fed by phases L2 and L3, but not the AC and DC outputs fed by the BBUE. The service switch is used to replace the BBUE unit without a break in power supply.
Figure 6. ACUC Front Side

The ACUC has a fuse block and four terminal blocks on the top: AC input terminal block AC output with backup AC output without backup DC output
All AC and DC connections from the Nokia Extratalk cabinet are led through the fuse block.
Figure 7. ACUC Terminal Blocks
3.4. Wall Sockets

The following connectors are located at the rear of the unit: Socket for AC supply to the heater/cooler IEC-socket for the Heat control unit (HCUB) 2-pole DC-connector Six terminal blocks for AC supply from and to the BBUE 9-pin female D-connector for control purposes
Figure 8. ACUC Rear Connections Table 3.

Socket Number A 163 S 101 A 162 A 165 A 166 A 160
ACUC Rear Connectors

Socket Name 48V DC IN Heater/cooler output HCUB output BBUE from BBUE to Control Socket Type 2-pole 3-pole IEC socket 3 rail-mounted terminal blocks 3 rail-mounted terminal blocks 9-pin male D-connector Line Type -48 VDC/32 A 230 VAC/16 A 230 VAC/10 A 230 VAC/40 A 230 VAC/40 A
Table 4.
Pin 1 2 Signal
Pin configuration of the DCUC 9-pin D-connector

Description Deep discharge relay control for service purpose -48 VDC for relay control
SER_CO SER_GND
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
48VGND OR_CO FM9 -
-48 VDC for relay control AC load relay control
Fuse monitoring
4. ACUD
4.1. Front View
The ACUD has the following components on the front panel: AC main switch Residual Current Breaker (RCD) 30 mA for AC output Customer-specific maintenance socket for 230 VAC output (PE, N, and L1 poles, line type 230VAC/16A) MCB-type 16 A fuse for AC output
The main switch controls all AC feed to the Extratalk cabinet.
Figure 9. ACUD Front View

There are two terminal blocks and one fuse block on the top.
Figure 10. ACUD Terminal Blocks
4.3. Wall Sockets

The ACUD has the following connectors at the rear: Four sockets for AC output DC connector
Figure 11. ACUD Rear Connectors Table 5.

Socket Number S 72 S 73 S 74 S 75 S 70
ACUD Sockets
Socket Type 3-pole wall socket 3-pole wall socket 3-pole wall socket 3-pole wall socket 2-pole DC socket Terminal block Terminal block Direction ACUD=>Rectifier ACUD=>Rectifier ACUD=>Rectifier ACUD=>Heater DCUD=>ACUD ACUD=>BTS Basic cabinet ACUD=>BTS Extension cabinet ACUD=>BTS Basic cabinet ACUD=>BTS Extension cabinet Line Type 230VAC 230VAC 230VAC 230VAC -48VDC/100A 230VAC 230VAC
Terminal block Terminal block
-48VDC -48VDC
Overvoltage alarm connector
Green 2-pole connector
ACUD=>customer's alarm line On/Off switch
5. TECHNICAL DATA
5.1. Dimensions and Weight
Table 6.
Height (max.) Width (max.) Depth (max.) Weight (max.)
Dimensions and Weight of the ACU

167 mm (6.6 in) 445 mm (17.5 in) 260 mm (10.2 in) 9,5 kg (20,9 lb)
5.2. AC Input and Output

Table 7. AC Input Values
ACUA Input Voltage Input Current/Line (max.) Input Frequency Protection ACUC ACUD
230/208/240 VAC (1-phase) 400 VAC (3-phase) 400 VAC (3-phase) 63 A 40 A 25 A 50/60 Hz Fuse; overvoltage protection (optional)
Table 8.
AC Output Values
ACUA ACUC 230 VAC ACUD 230 VAC
Output Voltage Output Frequency Protection
230/208/240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Fuse; residual current circuit breaker (RCD, GFI)
Table 9.
DC Output for Customer Purposes

ACUA ACUC -48 VDC ACUD -48 VDC
Nominal Output Voltage Output current max.
-48 VDC 63 A
Standard 6 A, (max. 32 50A A)
Protection
Fuse; overvoltage protection (optional)
5.3. Overvoltage Protection

Overvoltage protection is provided by overvoltage units for AC and DC. The overvoltage units are optional equipment. The maintenance socket and all AC and DC outputs are protected by MCB-type fuses.
5.4. EMC
The AC connection unit complies with ETSI 300 242-2 EMC standard for Base Station's Ancillary Equipment in installation of the Nokia Extratalk.
AC Power Distribution Unit ACUE, H6Z 063485AE/2.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This unit supplies the AC power distribution for the Nokia Flexitalk Mini GSM 900/GSM 1800 BTS Indoor Office Plinth and outlets for customer transmission equipment and auxiliary equipment. The scope of the ACUE is to provide distribution of AC power within the Office plinth BTS mounting option. Circuit breakers are incorporated for the protection of people and internal communication equipment as well as external auxiliary equipment. The ACUE is designed to cater for a wide AC input range i.e. 187Vac to 254Vac. It incorporates an input isolation switch which can be used to connect and disconnect the supply. Provision has been made for two interchangeable auxiliary AC power sockets with circuit breakers on the front panel.
Figure 1. ACUE Mechanical Outline
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.1. AC Input Connector (PL1)
The single phase AC mains input connector is IEC320 16A rated at 250Vac and the connector has a connector lock securing power cord to prevent accidental power interruption.
2.2. AC Input Isolator Switch (SW1)

Three pole switch with 25A 600Vac rating provides isolation for the incoming mains (both live and neutral), the switch is lockable in the OFF position.
2.3. Power Indicator (IND1)

240Vac panel mounting indicator, 10mm red LED.
2.4. BTS Power Connector (SK1)

The single phase power for the BTS system is made available through an IEC 10A connector rated at 250Vac. The connector is protected from accidental disconnection by the use of a spring retaining clip as a security measure.
2.5. Auxiliary Power 1 (SK2)

Single Phase auxiliary power provided by this socket is the same voltage as that applied to the AC input connector PL1. The socket can provide 3A max, via a single pole 3A MCB (Miniature Circuit Breaker) Type C characteristic with a breaking capacity of 6KA. The socket is an interchangeable (Mosaic type) and is fitted without affecting the mechanics of the front panel. Flying leads are provided through the front panel aperture for connection to the correct socket type, these sockets are fitted at the integration stage prior to shipment from the Nokia factory.
Figure 2. ACUE Wiring Diagram
2.6. Auxiliary Power 2 (SK3)

Single Phase auxiliary power provided by this socket is the same voltage as that applied to the AC input connector PL1. The socket provides 6A max, via a 2-pole 6A RCD (Residual Current Operated Device) with a tripping sensitivity of 30mA and a breaking capacity of 6KA. A test button for the RCD is available from the front. The socket is an interchangeable (Mosaic type) and is fitted without affecting the mechanics of the front panel. Flying leads are provided through the front panel aperture for connection to the correct socket type, these sockets are fitted at the integration stage prior to shipment from the Nokia factory.
2.7. Earthing
An internal isolated earth bar (E1) is provided at the rear of the panel to accommodate up to 6, 14 AWG internal earth connections. One external earth connection (E2) M8 x 22mm stud with two shakeproof washers and two brass nickel plated nuts is provided at the front of the panel.
2.8. Magnetic Switch (SW2)

A proximity switch is provided on the front panel for remote sensing of the door with a magnet mounted on the inside of the door.
2.9. Door Alarm Connector (PL2)

A two pin panel mounted phoenix connector is provided at the front of the panel for the door alarm signal with a lock to prevent accidental disconnection of mated connectors. PL2 is used to connect the ACUE alarm information to EAC Customer Alarms 0-11 connector located in the BTS roofspace, Pin 7 (EXT_AL0) and pin 19 (DGND).
3. TECHNICAL DATA
3.1. AC Input/Output Requirements
Table 1.
250V AC, PL1 AC Auxiliary Supply 1, SK2
ACUE Input and Output Voltages

250V AC, 16A/21A IEC 320 3 pin panel mount inlet plug Single pole 3A MCB type C characteristic, breaking capacity of 6KA 2 pole 6A RCD type C characteristic, tripping sensitivity of 30mA and breaking capacity of 6KA 250V AC, 10A IEC 3pin panel mounted outlet socket
AC Auxiliary Supply 2, SK3
BTS Power Mains Supply, SK1

Table 2.
Width Height Depth Weight
Dimensions and Weight of the ACUE

483 mm 177 mm 103 mm (not including the front panel components) 2.5 Kg excluding packaging
4. APPENDIX 1: MPRA DETAILS

The Mini Plinth Rack Assembly (MPRA) is rack assembly designed to be fitted into the Indoor Office Plinth (MFPC) in order to house the ACUE unit and a modem which is customer specific. An example is shown in Figure 3.
Figure 3. MPRA Layout
Antenna Filter Extension Unit AFE, B6Z 056006AE/4.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
The GSM Antenna Filter Extension Unit (AFE) is used in high traffic environments where handling high capacity is critical. The AFE allows two transmitters to attach to a single antenna, thereby doubling capacity. The AFE configuration can be used with existing Nokia Talk-family BTS networks to obtain additional transmit channels without adding more antennas. This document describes the main functions, functional blocks, and external interfaces of the AFE. The versions described in this document are: GSM 900: AFEA/D/H/J/M/N GSM 1800: AFEB GSM 1900: AFEL
The AFE allows either one or two transmitters (TX) to connect to one common TRX antenna. It comprises two main sections: the RX branch and the TX branch. A diversity RX branch is also included. Figure 1 shows the mechanical outline of the AFEA (GSM 900).
Figure 1. AFEA for GSM 900 Mechanical Outline Figure 2 shows the front panels of the AFEB unit for GSM 1800, the AFEL unit for GSM 1900, and the AFEA/D/H/J/M/N unit for GSM 900.
Figure 2. AFE Front Panel Layouts
2.1. Features
Following are the main features of the AFE: Wideband TX combiner accommodates a maximum of two TX inputs with a removable external link for operation with a single TX. The addition of an external link allows for duplex operation of the RX (receive) and TX (transmit) into a common antenna cable. Bandpass filtering for RX paths minimizes out-of-band interference in the RX channels. Two balanced Low Noise Amplifiers (LNAs) in the main and diversity RX paths amplify and divide the signals to different receivers. LNAs generate alarms to indicate a fault in main and diversity amplifiers. Four main RX outputs and two diversity RX outputs support high-capacity configurations. The bi-directional coupler provides a TX test signal output for the test/monitor unit. TX antenna VSWR monitoring allows for detection of the antennas and cabling. In the AFEL, bias feeds provide power for the main and diversity Masthead Amplifiers
(MHA) via the 37-pin D connector and a Bias Tee. In the other AFE units (Exception:AFEB), power is provided through the center conductor of the main and diversity RX antenna connectors. The AFE unit monitors the MHA bias current and generates alarms in the event of a fault. Test directional couplers for both main and diversity RX paths provide a loop-back facility for testing. A switch directs the loop-back signal either to the receiver or to the RX antenna. This allows for estimation of the Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) for the RX antenna. (AFEL does not have this function.) Overtemperature alarm indication.
2.2. Operation
The AFE amplifies the received RX and diversity RX signals, it then splits these signals to output them to the receivers of the transceiver units (TRXs). The AFE provides both VSWR and power monitoring for the transmitted signal and provides test signal output for the Site Test Monitor (if available). RX antenna monitoring can be implemented on both main and diversity branches if the branches have separate RX antennas (Exception: AFEL). If a common TRX antenna is used, the RX antenna monitoring is carried out by the TX antenna. Two AFE units can be connected to four TRXs in dual duplex operation, in which case the diversity branches of the AFE units remain unconnected. One AFE unit feeds the main branches of the TRXs, while the other AFE unit feeds the diversity branches of the TRXs.
2.3. Main Blocks

The AFE consists of two main functional blocks: the TX branch and the RX branch. See Figure 3.
Figure 3. Main Functional Blocks of the AFE
3. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
3.1. TX Branch
The AFE TX branch contains two functional blocks, an integrated duplexer and a wideband combiner (3 dB hybrid), to double the transmit capacity. See Figure 4.
Figure 4. Functional Blocks of the TX Branch Each TX input contains an isolator which blocks interference from the antenna to the transmitters (TXs) and between two TXs. The 3 dB hybrid can be used to combine two TXs. When only one TX is used, the 3 dB hybrid can be bypassed, which increases the maximum output power by 3 dB. The duplex filter connects the TX and RX branches to the common antenna, provides 30 dB (minimum) isolation between the RX and TX branches, and rejects TX noise outside the TX band. The bi-directional coupler provides the test signal output for the test/monitor unit and the monitoring function for the common antenna. Antenna Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) monitoring is based on a forward and reflected power measurement. 3.1.1. Main and Diversity RX Branches For both the main and diversity RX branches: The AFE units for GSM 900 and GSM 1800 applications include a test module (RF-switched bi-directional coupler).
All AFE units include a RX filter and a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) module.
Figure 5. Functional Blocks of RX Branch, GSM 900/1800
Figure 6. Functional Blocks of RX Branch, GSM 1900 Each of the main and diversity RX antenna inputs in GSM 900 and GSM 1800 systems has a test directional coupler. A switch is provided in the test module to connect the loopback signal either directly to the receiver or to the RX antenna. The RX antenna VSWR can be estimated when using the RX path loopback function by comparing the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) level to the level obtained when the signal is coupled to the antenna and subsequently reflected back to the receiver. This switching is controlled by a DC voltage applied to the center pin of the TEST connector. If a common antenna is being used for RX and TX (i.e., if the duplexer is in use), the TX antenna supervising function is used to determine VSWR. The MHA receives a DC bias voltage from the center conductor of the RX main or diversity antenna feeder cable. This bias is provided via the 37-pin D connector and a Bias Tee in the AFEL. In the other AFE units, power is provided through the center conductor of the main and diversity RX antenna connectors. The RX filter is a passive filter mounted into a metal cast.
The LNA is a low noise balanced amplifier which forms the front end of the receiver chain in both the normal and diversity branches. The LNA takes the signal from the band-pass filter and provides low noise amplification to four RX outputs in the main branch and two RX outputs in the diversity branch. From these outputs, the signals are connected to the RX module inputs in the TRX unit. Bias voltages in each stage of the amplifier are monitored to provide an alarm signal in the event of a failure.
4. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION
All models of the AFE have LEDs and interface connectors: The AFEL (GSM 1900) has 16 interface connectors (15 RF plus 1 power and control). All other AFEs have 18 interface connectors (17 RF plus 1 power and control).
All external interfaces are located on the front panel of the unit. Table 1.
Connector Name ANTENNA TX TX COMB TX1 TX2 RX DUP OUT RX ANT/MAIN RX ANT DIV RX ANT
AFE Interface Connectors

Type 7/16 N N N N N N N Purpose TX/RX antenna connector Transmitter input in case of one TRX Combination of two TXs in case of two TRXs Transmitter 1 in case of two TRXs Transmitter 2 in case of two TRXs Duplexer RX output Main RX path antenna connector (from duplexer) Diversity RX path antenna connector Main RX path test input (from Site Test Monitor)
TEST/TEST MAIN [Note: For GSM SMA 900/1800 systems only.] DIV TEST/TEST DIV [Note: For GSM 900/1800 systems only.] MAIN RX 1 MAIN RX 2 MAIN RX 3 MAIN RX 4 DIV RX 1 SMA
Diversity RX path test input (from Site Test Monitor)
SMA SMA SMA SMA SMA
RX 1 output RX 2 output RX 3 output RX 4 output Diversity RX 1 output
DIV RX 2 TEST OUT
SMA SMA
Diversity RX 2 output Test output to Site Test Monitor (or spectrum analyzer in the case of AFEC)
X1/SKT1
37-pin D connector Front panel connections for power, alarms, and controls
4.1. Front Panel LEDs

The colors and explanations of the front panel LEDs are given in Table 2. Table 2.
Color Red Yellow Green
AFE Front Panel LEDs

Code FLT ALM OPR Explanation Fault (failure of both main and diversity LNA or overtemperature alarm) Alarm (degraded LNA performance) Normal operation
Note: MHA alarms have no effect on front panel LEDs.
4.2. Connector X1 (GSM 900: AFEA/D/H/J/M/N)

The pin configuration of the X1 connector on the AFEA/D/H/J/M/N front panel is detailed in Figure 7 and Table 3.
Figure 7. Connector X1 (AFEA/D/H/J/M/N) Table 3.

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12-17
Connector X1 Pin Configuration (AFEA/D/H/J/M/N)

Signal DGND VSWR REF V TEMP AL 1LAN AL1 1LNA AL2 1MHA AL 1MHA CONTROL 1LNA TEST1 1LNA TEST2 1LNA TEST3 1LNA TEST4 NOT USED Description Digital ground VSWR sense voltage from combiner Temperature alarm from combiner First level alarm from diversity LNA Second level alarm from diversity LNA Diversity branch MHA alarm Diversity branch MHA power control Diversity LNA test line 1 Diversity LNA test line 2 Diversity LNA test line 3 Diversity LNA test line 4
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29-35 36 37
+12 V AGND DGND 2LNA AL1 2LNA AL2 2MHA AL 2MHA CONTROL 2LNA TEST1 2LNA TEST2 2LNA TEST3 2LNA TEST4 NOT USED -12 V AGND
Power supply +12 V Analog ground Digital ground First level alarm from main LNA Second level alarm from main LNA Main branch MHA alarm Main branch MHA power control Main LNA test line 1 Main LNA test line 2 Main LNA test line 3 Main LNA test line 4 Power supply -12 V Analog ground
4.3. Connector SKT1 (GSM 1800: AFEB)

Table 4.
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31-35 36
Connector SKT1 Pin Configuration (AFEB)

Signal NOT USED VSWR REF V TEMP AL 1LNA AL1 DIV 1LNA AL2 DIV NOT USED NOT USED 1LNA TEST1 1LNA TEST2 1LNA TEST3 1LNA TEST4 NOT USED NOT USED LRED LYEL LGRN NOT USED +12 V AGND NOT USED 2LNA AL1 2LNA AL2 NOT USED NOT USED 2LNA TEST1 2LNA TEST2 2LNA TEST3 2LNA TEST4 NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED -12 V Description VSWR monitor reference voltage Temperature alarm output First level alarm from diversity LNA Second level alarm from diversity LNA
Diversity LNA test line 1 Diversity LNA test line 2 Diversity LNA test line 3 Diversity LNA test line 4
Red LED alarm Yellow LED alarm Green LED alarm Power supply +12 V Analog ground First level alarm from main LNA Second level alarm from main LNA
Main LNA test line 1 Main LNA test line 2 Main LNA test line 3 Main LNA test line 4
Power supply -12 V
37
AGND
Analog ground
4.4. Connector SKT1 (GSM 1900: AFEL)

Table 5.
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Connector SKT1 Pin Configuration (AFEL)

Signal DGND VSWR REF V TEMP AL DIV LNA_AL1 DIV LNA_AL2 MHP AL DIV MHP CONT DIV TEST1 DIV TEST2 DIV TEST3 DIV TEST4 DIV MHP MAIN MHP DIV NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED +12 V AGND DGND LNA_AL1 LNA_AL2 MHP AL MAIN MHP CONT MAIN TEST1 MAIN TEST2 MAIN TEST3 MAIN TEST4 MAIN AGND (MHP GND MAIN) AGND (MHP GND DIV) NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED -12 V AGND Description Digital ground VSWR monitor reference voltage Overtemperature alarm Diversity LNA degraded (one LNA branch failed) Diversity LNA not functional (both LNA branches failed) Diversity MHP alarm Diversity MHP control Diversity LNA test " " " Power feed for main MHP Power feed for diversity MHP
+12 V input Analog ground (0 V AFEL ref) Digital ground Main LNA degraded (one LNA branch failed) Main LNA not functional (both LNA branches failed) Main MHP alarm Main MHP control Main LNA test input " " " Power ground for main MHP Power ground for diversity MHP
-12 V input Analog ground (0 V AFEL ref)
5. TECHNICAL DATA
5.1. Electrical Data
Table 6.
Supply Voltages
Supply Voltages and Current Consumption

Typical Current Consumption AFEA/D/H/J/M/N AFEB/L <90 mA 700 mA
-12 V (analog) +12 V (analog)
200 mA 1A
Table 7.
Nominal Power Consumption

AFEA/D/H/J/M/N AFEB/L 10 W; max. 12 W without MHA board, 15 W with MHA board
Power
15 W

Table 8. Dimensions and Weight
GSM 900 (AFEA/D/H/J/M/N) Height Width Depth Weight 262 mm (10.3 in) 137 mm (5.5 in) 287.5 mm (11.5 in) max. 13 kg (28 lb) GSM 1800/1900 (AFEB/L) 262 mm (10.3 in) 137 mm (5.5 in) max. 314.5 mm (12.4 in) max. 10 kg (22 lb)
5.3. RF Performance Values

Table 9. RF Performance Values
GSM 900 (AFEA/D/H/J/M/N) GSM 1800 (AFEB) Duplex Separation Duplex Filter Bandwidth TX Frequency Range 45 MHz 35 MHz 925 ... 960 MHz 95 MHz 75 MHz 1805 ... 1880 MHz GSM 1900 (AFEL) 80 MHz 60 MHz 1930 ... 1990 MHz
Table 10. RX Frequency Ranges

Unit AFEA AFEM RX Frequency Range 880 ... 915 MHz 880 ... 915 MHz
AFED AFEJ AFEN AFEH AFEB AFEL
888 ... 910 MHz 890 ... 915 MHz 891 ... 912.5 MHz 897.5 ... 915 MHz 1710 ... 1785 MHz 1850 ... 1910 MHz

Primary overvoltage protection is provided by external circuitry which protects the AFE unit from residual voltage.
5.5. Handling and Storage Requirements

Some high-powered components of the AFE unit contain beryllium oxide. Take care to avoid damage to these components when handling the AFE unit. The AFE plug-in unit weighs approximately 10 kg (22 lb). Use caution when removing the unit from the subrack. Do not place any magnetic materials within 25 mm (1 in) of the AFE units.
Nokia Antenna Filter High-Power Unit AFH for GSM 900/1800/1900, D6Z 467151AE/2.0.0
1. INTRODUCTION
The Nokia Antenna Filter High-Power Unit (AFH) is part of the Nokia Booster configuration. The Booster configuration fits seamlessly into Nokia's 3rd Generation base stations, enabling the same geographic coverage with fewer base stations. The main units comprising the Booster configuration are: Transmitter Booster Unit (TBU); Antenna Filter High-Power Unit (AFH); and Masthead Amplifier (MHA). The AFH is a modified filter unit that withstands the higher RF power transmitted by the Transmitter Booster Unit (TBU). The AFH also amplifies and filters uplink (received RF) before it reaches the TRX; and it filters downlink (transmitted RF). There are four versions of the AFH: GSM 900: AFHA for E-GSM 900 RF band, including both the Primary band (P-GSM 900) and the extension band (G1). AFHJ for the Primary band (P-GSM 900) GSM 1800: AFHB GSM 1900: AFHL This document describes the main functions, functional blocks, and external interfaces of the AFH. The AFH unit comprises two main sections: the RX (Receive) branch and the TX (Transmit) branch. The first branch includes the RX and the diversity RX branches. Figure 1 shows the front panels of the AFHA and AFHJ for GSM 900; and AFHB and AFHL for GSM 1800 and 1900.
Figure 1. AFH Front Panel Connector Layouts
2.1. Features
Following are the main features of the AFH :
RX band-pass filtering minimizes out-of-band signals to reduce interference with received channels. For cable and antenna operation, VSWR monitoring with associated alarms at the TX connector is operational when a transmitter is active.
RX and DIV RX signals are amplified by means of a separate, Supply voltage to the Masthead Amplifier (MHA) is fed balanced, low-noise amplifier (LNA). through the 37-pin D connector, utilizing the Bias Tee in the BTS. Amplified signals are divided into three receiver outputs in the RX branch and one receiver output in the Diversity RX Self-testing is continuous for internal (VSWR, LNA) and external (MHA) functions.
branch. A single transmitter is connected to the common antenna. TBU alarms are routed to the base station via the AFH connectors.
RX and TX branches can be connected to the common antenna via a duplexer.
2.2. Operation
The AFH filters uplink and downlink and amplifies uplink signals before dividing them into the RX1, RX2, and RX3 outputs, and one DIV RX output. The signals are then routed to the transceiver units.
Figure 2. Conceptual Booster Configuration and the AFHL The AFH provides VSWR monitoring for the RX/TX common cable antenna. There are three RX outputs and one diversity RX output for various configurations.
2.3. Main Blocks

The AFH consists of two main functional blocks: TX branch and RX branch.
Figure 3. Main Functional Blocks of the AFH 2.3.1. TX Branch The TX branch of the AFH contains a duplex filter and TX Antenna Power/VSWR monitor.
Figure 4. Functional Blocks of the TX Branch The duplex filter connects the AFH's TX and RX branches to the RX/TX common antenna; provides isolation between the RX and TX paths; and conditions both the TX and RX signals by attenuating their out-of-band signals. Directional couplers in the AFH allow it to monitor the base station's common antenna. Antenna monitoring is based on the forward and reflected power measurement (VSWR). A TEST OUT connector from the coupler is available for on-site monitoring of system performance. 2.3.2. RX and Diversity RX Branches The RX and diversity RX branches of the AFH consist of an RX filter and a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA).
Figure 5. Functional Blocks of the RX and Diversity RX Branches The MHA can be used in both the RX and DIV RX branches of the AFH. The interface module of the AFH controls the MHA. The MHA gets a DC supply voltage from the AFH's 37-pin D connector via the Bias Tee. The AFH gets its power and MHA control signals from the base station's BCFA. The RX filter is a passive filter which is mounted into a metal cast. The LNA is a low-noise, balanced amplifier which forms the front end of the receiver chain in both the RX and DIV RX branches. The LNA takes the signal from the band-pass filter in the RX branch and provides low noise amplification to three receiver outputs in the RX branch, and one receiver output in the DIV RX branch. The AFH RX and DIV RX outputs are connected to the RX and diversity receivers of one or more TRXs.
The transistors of each RX and DIV RX LNA are monitored and an alarm is generated in the event of partial or total LNA failure. The alarms appear both in the LED and as a signal at the 37-pin D connector.
The AFH sends the TBU, MHA, VSWR, and RX/DIV RX LNA alarms through its 37-pin D connector to the base station's BCFA. The AFH has 12 interface connectors and three LEDs. All external interfaces are located on the front panel of the AFH. Table 1.
Connector Name ANTENNA TX DUP OUT RX ANT DIV RX ANT RX 1 RX 2 RX 3 DIV RX TEST OUT X2 (AFHB, AFHL) X1 (AFHA, AFHJ) X1 (AFHB, AFHL) X2 (AFHA, AFHJ)
AFH Interface Connectors

Type 7/16 N N N N SMA SMA SMA SMA SMA 37-pin D connector 9-pin D connector Purpose TX/RX Antenna Connector Transmitter Input Duplexer RX Output RX path Antenna Connector (from duplexer or separate antenna) Diversity RX path Antenna Connector RX1 Output RX2 Output RX3 Output Diversity RX Output Test Output for TX Monitoring Front Panel Connections for the Power Supply, Alarms and Controls, MHA Bias Connector for TBU Alarms
3.1. TBUAlarms
The TBU alarm wires are passed through the AFH to the BCFA.
3.2. MHA Alarms

The MHA_AL alarm and the DIV MHA_AL_alarm are active when the MHA bias current is out of the operational range, or when the supply voltage to the MHA is disabled.
3.3. VSWR Alarm

The AFH measures the VSWR and passes this information to the BCFA.
3.4. AFH LNA Alarms
The AFH unit has two LNA alarm outputs (binary coded). The AFH unit can distinguish three alarm cases: 1)Minor fault in any branch; 2) Major fault in the main branch with diversity functional; 3) Major fault in both branches.

The colors and explanations of the front panel LEDs are in Table 2. Table 2.
Color Red Yellow Green
AFH Front Panel LEDs

Code FLT ALM OPR Explanation Failure (Both RX and DIV RX are not functional.) Alarm (LNA performance is degraded due to partial failure.) Normal Operation
3.6. 9-Pin D Connector

The pin configuration of the 9-pin D connector on the AFH front panel is detailed in Figure 6 and Table 3.
Figure 6. 9-Pin D Connector Table 3.

PIN # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9-Pin D Connector Configuration

SIGNAL NO CONNECTION TEMP AL AGND NO CONNECTION GAIN AL AGND NO CONNECTION VSWR AL AGND NOTES NO CONNECTION Routed to D-37 pin 3 Analog Ground NO CONNECTION Routed to D-37 pin 5 Analog Ground NO CONNECTION Routed to D-37 pin 4 Analog Ground
3.7. 37-Pin D Connector

The pin configuration of the 37-pin D connector on the front panel is detailed in Figure 7 and Table 4.
Figure 7. 37-Pin D Connector Table 4.

Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
37-Pin D Connector Configuration

Signal DGND VSWR REF V TEMP AL VSWR AL GAIN AL DIV MHA AL DIV MHA CONT TEST Notes Digital Ground VSWR Monitor Reference Voltage From D-9 pin 2 From D-9 pin 8 From D-9 pin 5 Diversity Masthead Amp Alarm Diversity Masthead Amp Control Test
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
TEST TEST TEST MHA DIV MHA NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION + 12 V AGND DGND LNA MINOR LNA MAJOR MHA AL MHA CONT TEST TEST TEST TEST MHA GND MHA GND NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION -12 V AGND
Test Test Test Power Feed for Masthead Amp Power Feed for Diversity Masthead Amp NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION + 12 V input Analog Ground Digital Ground LNA RX and/or DIV RX paths degraded LNA RX path non-functional Masthead Amp Alarm Masthead Amp Control Test Test Test Test Power Ground for Masthead Amp Power Ground for Masthead Amp NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION - 12 V Input Analog Ground
4. TECHNICAL DATA
Following is the technical data for the AFH.
4.1. RX Frequency Ranges

Table 5 provides RX frequency ranges for the AFH. Table 5.
AFHA AFHJ AFHB AFHL
RX Frequency Ranges
880 ... 915 MHz 890 ... 915 MHz 1710 ... 1785 MHz 1850 ... 1910 MHz

Table 6 provides RF performance values for the AFH. Table 6.
Parameter Duplex Separation Duplex Filter Bandwidth TX Frequency Range
RF Performance Values
AFHA/J 45 MHz 35 MHz 925 ... 960 MHz AFHB 95 MHz 75 MHz 1805 ... 1880 MHz AFHL 80 MHz 60 MHz 1930 ... 1990 MHz

Table 7 and Table 8 provide electrical data for the AFH. Table 7.
Supply Voltages
Supply Voltages and Current Consumption Excluding current used by the MHA
Typical Current Consumption AFH
< 90 mA < 900 mA
Table 8.
AFH
Nominal Power Consumption Excluding Power Used by the MHA

< 12 W

The AFH's alarms and control lines are protected against 30 VDC (8 ms) overvoltage. Protection against overvoltage coming from the antenna is implemented by DC grounding of all antenna connectors. When the MHA is used, the Bias Tee on the roof of the base station acts as a primary surge protector. The surge arrester on the AFH's interface module acts as the secondary overvoltage protector in MHA bias lines. Secondary protection is needed to protect the MHA bias line against the residual pulse of the preliminary surge arrester in the antenna cables.

Table 9 provides dimensions and weight for the AFH.
Table 9.
Parameter Height Width Depth Weight
Dimensions and Weight

AFH 262 mm (10.3 in) 137 mm (5.5 in) 314.5 Maximum 11.5 kg (19 lb) Maximum

The AFH weighs about 8 kg. Use caution when removing the AFH plug-in unit from the subrack.
Antenna Twin Filter Unit AFT, H6Z 057906AE/3.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main functional features and the external interfaces of the Antenna Filter Twin Unit (AFT). This description covers units designed for GSM 1800 (AFTB) and GSM 1900 (AFTL) applications. The mechanical outline drawings of the unit are shown in Figures 1 and 2.
Figure 1. Typical AFT Mechanical Outline
Figure 2. AFT Front Panel Note: The position of the Main Rx In and Test Main connectors may vary in the vertical plane from unit to unit.
2. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The AFT provides the following functionality: Dual duplex operation of RX and TX into common antenna cables. RX roofing filter for RX path antennas to minimise out of band interference to the receive chains. Balanced low noise amplifier for both main and diversity receive paths with alarm outputs providing fault indication for each branch of each path. Each alarm to be a summary of the status of individual active devices within the branch.
Four main RX and two diversity RX outputs. Two directional couplers for TX antenna 1 and 2 VSWR monitoring. AFTL only: Test directional coupler for both main and diversity RX providing a loopback facility. A switch is provided to connect the loopback signal to either receiver directly or to direct it towards the receive antenna. Thus the receive antenna VSWR can be estimated. Accommodates Masthead Power Supply Board to provide the power to the optional Masthead Amplifier.
Figure 3 details the AFT functionality.
Figure 3. Functional Block Diagram of the AFT
2.1. TX Branch
As the AFT provides dual duplexing, the unit is able to take the TX output from two TRX units and route the signal to separate antenna cables. There is no wideband combining feature. Each antenna has an associated VSWR monitor
2.2. RX Branch
The main and diversity branches comprise: an RF directional coupler, a filter and an LNA. AFTL only: The coupler enables the AFT to measure the Main and Diverse RX antenna VSWR. It can couple the TEST MAIN and TEST DIV inputs to either the LNA board or the respective RX antenna. This switching is controlled by a d.c. voltage applied to the centre pin of the RF connector. The RF filter is used to minimise the effects of out-of-band interference to the receiver circuitry from incoming RF signals. The LNAs provide amplification for incoming RF signals. They also provide alarm outputs for each RX path.
2.3. Alarms and Monitors

The alarms are provided by open collector/drain devices capable of sinking a maximum of 20mA. An alarm condition is indicated by a high impedance state. 2.3.1. LNA Alarms Alarms are provided for the following LNA conditions: Failure of one branch of the Main LNA Failure of one branch of the Div LNA Failure of both the branches of the Main LNA Failure of both the branches of the Div LNA
2.3.2. Over Temperature Alarm An over temperature alarm is provided by the AFT. The alarm condition shall be activated if the temperature exceeds a nominal value of 100C (+212F) in the region of the circulator loads.
2.3.3. Indicator LEDs The AFT has three front panel indicator LEDs which indicate the following: An illuminated green LED (OPR) indicates correct operation. An illuminated yellow LED (ALM) indicates a failure of a single branch in the LNA (i.e. non-critical failure) An illuminated red LED (FLT) indicates that both main and diverse paths in the LNA have failed, or that an over temperature condition exists
2.3.4. Transmit Antenna Monitoring A coupler is located adjacent to the antenna connector in each duplexer to monitor the antenna VSWR and the forward transmitted power. Each duplexer/coupler generates a single output voltage which provides both VSWR information and a low power alarm. A control line is used to select which of the two VSWR monitor voltages is output to the VSWR REF V pin of SKT 1 on the front panel. VSWR sense circuits provide an indication of the antenna VSWR and generate an output voltage that is proportional to the return loss.
There are 19 interface connectors on the AFT front panel. They are detailed below: Table 1.
Connector SKT 1 ANTENNA 1 ANTENNA 2 TX 1 TX 2 RX1 DUP OUT RX2 DUP OUT TEST OUTPUT 1 TEST OUTPUT 2 MAIN RX IN DIV RX IN MAIN RX 1 MAIN RX 2 MAIN RX 3 MAIN RX 4 DIV RX 1 DIV RX 2
Front Panel Interfaces

Type Male 37-way D-type connector 7/16, Female N, Female N, Female N, Female N, Female N, Female SMA, Female SMA, Female N, Female N, Female SMA, Female SMA, Female SMA, Female SMA, Female SMA, Female SMA, Female Purpose Antenna input/output Antenna input/output Tx input from TRX1 Tx input from TRX2 Duplexer RX output path Duplexer RX output path TX connection to test unit TX connection to test unit Main antenna input to LNA Div antenna input to LNA RX 1 output to TRX RX2 output to TRX RX3 output to TRX RX4 output to TRX Div RX 1 output to TRX Div RX2 output to TRX
TEST MAIN (AFTL only) TEST DIV (AFTL only)
SMA, Female SMA, Female
Main RX connection to test unit Div RX connection to test unit
SKT 1 is a test and status interface. The pin-out is detailed below: Table 2.
PIN No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
SKT1 Interface
SIGNAL N/C VSWR REF V TEMP AL AL1 DIV AL2 DIV MHA AL DIV VSWR SELECT TEST 1 DIV TEST 2 DIV TEST 3 DIV TEST 4 DIV MHA MAIN MHA DIV LRED LYEL LGRN N/C + 12V AGND N/C AL1 MAIN AL2 MAIN MHA AL MAIN MHA CONT MAIN/DIV TEST 1 MAIN TEST 2 MAIN TEST 3 MAIN TEST 4 MAIN MHA GND MHA GND N/C N/C N/C N/C + 24V (B) +26V (L) - 12V AGND FUNCTION Not used VSWR monitor reference voltage Temperature alarm output Diverse LNA first level alarm Diverse LNA second level alarm Diverse masthead pre-amp alarm Selects which VSWR monitor is switched to the VSWR REF V output Diverse LNA test input * Diverse LNA test input * Diverse LNA test input * Diverse LNA test input * Power feed for masthead pre-amp Power feed for masthead pre-amp Red LED alarm Yellow LED alarm Green LED alarm Not used + 12V input Analogue Ground (0 AFT ref) Not used Main LNA first level alarm Main LNA second level alarm Main masthead pre-amp alarm Main masthead pre-amp control Main LNA test input Main LNA test input Main LNA test input Main LNA test input Power ground for masthead pre-amp Power ground for masthead pre-amp Not used Not used Not used Not used + 24V/+ 26V input - 12V input Analogue ground (0V AFT ref)
The connections to the Masthead Power Supply module are made via a 14-way ribbon cable and connector (male header to MH PSU, female header and cable to AFT interface board). The pin-out is defined in the table below. Note: On the AFTB unit the Masthead Power Supply module is integrated with the interface board.
Table 3.
PIN No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
MH PSU Module Connections (AFTL Only)

SIGNAL + 12V Not Used MHA GND MHA GND +26V (L), +24V (B) +26V (L), +24V (B) MHA MAIN MHA AL DIV MHA DIV MHA CONT MAIN/DIV MHA AL MAIN MHA CONT. MAIN/DIV RESERVED RESERVED Input Gnd Input Gnd Input supply to MH PSU Input supply to MH PSU Main output supply (12.5V) MHA diverse alarm Diverse output supply (12.5V) Enable control line MHA main alarm Enable control line FUNCTION Input supply to MH PSU
4. OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION
The alarms and control lines on the front panel connector SKT1, are protected against a 30V pulsed overvoltage. A primary lightning protector can be installed on the feed cable to the AFT antenna ports. Secondary lightning protection circuitry is included at the ANTENNA 1, ANTENNA 2, MAIN RX and DIV RX inputs. These inputs have been designed to withstand a peak voltage transient of 200V.
5. HANDLING AND STORAGE REQUIREMENTS

The AFT weighs approximately 13kg (28.7 lb). Caution must be taken when removing the AFT plug-in unit from the subrack. Stray magnetic materials must be kept away from the AFT to protect the circulators.
6. TECHNICAL DATA
Table 4.
SUPPLY VOLTAGE +12V, +3% -8%
AFT Supply requirements

RIPPLE < 100mV p-p (10Hz - 3MHz) CONSUMPTION 900mA max. (including 100mA for MHA PSU bd) 90mA max. 850mA (for MHA PSU only)
-12V, +3% -8% +24V/26V, +3% -8%
< 100mV p-p (10Hz - 3MHz) < 100mV p-p (10Hz - 3MHz)
Maximum power consumption is 7.08W Table 5.

Height Width Depth Weight

261.8mm 136.75mm 314.5mm max. 13kg (10.3 in) (5.5 in) (12.4 in) (28.7 lb)
Table 6.
Parameter Duplex Separation
AFTB Variant (1800MHz) 95 MHz 75 MHz 1805 - 1880 MHz 1710 - 1785 MHz AFTL Variant (1900MHz) 80 MHz 60 MHz 1930 - 1990 MHz 1850 - 1910 MHz
Duplex Filter Bandwidth TX Frequency Range RX Frequency Range
Air Conditioner Unit AICA, B6Z 059507AE/3.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the Air Conditioner unit AICA. The AICA is used in the Nokia Citytalk+ and Extratalk+ cabinets in GSM 900, GSM 1800, and GSM 1900 applications to maintain the cabinet temperature on an acceptable level for the radio equipment. Figure 1 shows the AICA (attached to the rear of the cabinet) and the cowling box.
Figure 1. The AICA and the Cowling Box
The AICA is a combined 50/60 Hz Air Conditioner suitable for running at different voltages from 208 to 240 VAC. In addition to the AC supply, the AICA requires 48 VDC for the heat exchanger and the control system. The unit consists of a heat exchanger and an active cooler. The heat exchanger maintains the temperature during night and winter conditions at lower temperatures, and the active cooler is activated at higher temperatures. In battery backup applications, the heat exchanger functions as a backup system for the cooler during AC breakdowns. The internal and external air flows across the heat exchanger are separated.
Figure 2. Internal and External Circulation The cooling capacity is specified to 1.9 kW at peak performance. During normal operation the performance is adjusted to actual needs by controlling the speed of the fans and by switching ON/OFF the active cooler. The system is able to operate at ambient temperatures from -33C to +50C (-27F to +122F). The refrigerant type is R134a.
3. OPERATION
The main blocks of the AICA are the heat exchanger, the active cooler, and the control system. Control System: The control of the AICA is maintained by a 48 VDC heat management system controller type NAC-3, situated in a box above the compressor. On the basis of the return air temperature from the cabinet the controller will adjust the cooling capacity in accordance with the actual need. At low temperatures only the internal fan operates and at low speed. At increasing return air temperature the internal fan accelerates and later also the external fan so that heat is removed by the heat exchanger. Now the two fans run at medium speed and at low noise level. If the return air increases further, the cooling compressor starts to operate. If the temperature still increases, for example because of an AC failure or blocks in the air circulation, the two fans will accelerate to full speed and the condenser fan will start and accelerate to full speed when needed. The control system is equipped with status LEDs visible through the window in the enclosure box. In fault situations, an alarm is sent via the Heat Control Unit (HCU). When needed, the HCU can override the controller and turn the AICA to maximum cooling capacity. Figure 3 shows the main blocks in the heat exchanger part and the active cooler part.
Figure 3. Main Blocks Heat Exchanger: The heat exchanger fans operate from a 48 VDC supply. A heat exchanger is situated behind the main enclosure together with one internal fan and one external fan. Heat is recuperated from the internal air flow and transferred to the external air flow. The two air flows across the heat exchanger are separated. The heat exchanger part contains the following main functional blocks: Internal fan maintains an ideal air flow in the internal air circuit. External fan supplies the heat exchanger with the required air in the external air circuit. Recuperator removes the heat from the internal air circuit to the external circuit when both internal and external fans are operating.
Active Cooler: The cooler requires both AC (208 to 240 VAC) and 48 VDC supplies. When the heat exchanger can not remove enough heat, the built-in cooler will start. The evaporator coil (cooler) is situated behind a partition wall in the internal air flow, where heat is removed, and via the cooling circuit released in the condenser coil to the external air flow. The cooler is a normal, direct expansion system operating on refrigerant type R134a. The evaporator coil is regulated by a thermostatic expansion valve and the cooler is controlled ON and OFF via the solenoid valve and pressure state as a so-called pump-down system. The active cooler contains the following main functional blocks: Evaporator absorbs the heat load from the electronics in the internal circuit air flow. Compressor moves the refrigerant from evaporator to the condenser where the energy is released by condensation. Condenser makes the refrigerant condense. AC fan removes the energy released in the condenser with the ambient air.
3.1. Mechanics and Parts Layout

The aluminium cabinet completely encloses the unit but a removable service cover (shown in Figure 4) gives access for inspection of all vital parts except the evaporator coil. The service cover has inlet grilles for ambient air on two side plates and an outlet on the upper front part. The cover is fixed to the main housing with screws along the edge and has two lifting handles. Outside on the reverse side of the main housing there is one upper inlet opening for internal return air and one lower for internal outlet air.
Figure 4. AICA Cover Figure 5 shows the parts layout from the rear when the service cover is removed.
Figure 5. AICA Parts Layout, Rear Figure 6 shows the piping system.
Figure 6. AICA Piping System
4.1. AC Supply
AC power is supplied to the AICA via the cabinet. The AC connector in the AICA is a 3-pole ENSTO 16A male socket type AL18.10W. Table 1.
Brown Yellow/Green Blue
Cabinet AC Connector Connections

Live Protective earth Neutral
AC supply voltage is selectable 208, 220, 230, 240 10%, 50/60 Hz. Figure 7 shows the cabinet AC and DC connector pins:
Figure 7. AC and DC Supply Connectors in the Cabinet
4.2. DC Supply
DC (48 VDC 1 VDC) is supplied via a plug through the assembly plate. The AICA has a SUB D 13W3 male connector mounted on the front. Table 2.
Pin A1 A2 A3 1 2 3-5 6 7 8 9 10
DC Connector Pins
Purpose Input (+) for fans Input (-) for fans Input (-) for fans Input (+) for control board Input (-) for control board Reserved AIC_ALARM DGND_HCU +5V_HCU AIC_CTRL not used
DC connector pin configuration from the cabinet side is shown in Figure 7.
4.3. Controller Settings

The controller settings are accessible through the grid on the side of the AICA. A DIP switch under the upper rubber cap can be set for the BTS (Basic or Extension) cabinet or for the SSS (Site Support System) cabinets. Correct settings are shown on the controller (see Figure 8). Shaded areas indicate switch positions. There is an AC voltage selection switch and a 10 A fuse under the lower rubber cap.
Figure 8. Controller Settings and LED Display The controller's LED display is detailed in Table 3.
Table 3.
LED No. 1. Green 2. Red 3. Red 4. Red 5. Red 6. Red
LED Display
Designation DC Cond. fan/AC Comp. Int. fan Ext. fan Sensors Description ON when DC supply is present and no alarms are active. OFF indicates DC failure ON indicates missing AC or condenser fan failure ON indicates compressor failure ON indicates internal fan failure ON indicates external fan failure ON indicates sensor failure Sensors: Internal (return air) External (ambient air) Condenser ON when any of the above LEDs indicate a failure
7. Red
Fail out
5. TECHNICAL DATA
5.1. Refrigerant
Refrigerant type is R134a (1.1 kg).
5.2. Power Supply

Table 4.
AC DC
AC and DC Power Supply

Fuse T10 A 250 V, 5 x 20 mm, max. load 7.0 A Max. load 6.5 A
208, 220, 230, or 240 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz 48 VDC 1 VDC

Table 5.
Weight Height Width Depth
AICA Dimensions and Weight

63 kg 950 mm + 40 mm brackets underneath 565 mm 360 mm 138.6 lb 38 in + 1.6 in 22.6 in 14.4 in
Table 6.
Weight Height
Package Dimensions and Weight

22 kg 1149 mm 48.4 lb 46 in
Width Depth
647 mm 449 mm
25.9 in 18 in

The AICA must be stored indoors in an upright position at temperatures between -45C (-49F) and +45C (+113F). During transportation the AICA must be kept in an upright position. When packed in a plywood box, the AICA can be handled with a standard pallet lifter. Without the packing, the unit can be lifted by two persons using the handles on the sides.
Alarm Connection Unit APUA, B6Z 466271AE/2.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
The task of the Alarm Connection unit (APUA) is to control Hub Site alarms in the Nokia Extratalk cabinets. The APUA is used when the Nokia Extratalk cabinet is alone, not next to a Base Station. The APUA is a plug-in unit which can operate on either -40 V ... -60 V input voltage. This document describes the main features, functions, and external interfaces of the APUA. Figure 1 presents the APUA Unit.
Figure 1. APUA Unit
2.1. Operation
The APUA unit consists of a control board and mechanics. The APUA unit controls Nokia Extratalk cabinet alarms and sends the alarms to the radio link (LTE). The unit controls 25 different alarms 20 of which can be configured with DIP switches. The remaining 5 alarms are not configured with the DIP switches. When there are no alarms, the line is an open circuit.
2.2. APUA Block Diagram

Figure 2 presents the APUA Block Diagram.
Figure 2. APUA Block Diagram Operating voltage +5V for the logic is converted from the -40V....-60V input voltage.
3.1. Front Panel Interfaces

The APUA front panel is equipped with 2 LEDs and a 9-pin male D-connector. Under normal circumstances, the red LED (ALM) should be OFF and the green LED (OPR) should be ON. Table 1 presents the D-connector pins in the front panel. Table 1.
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Front Panel D-connector Pins

Signal Power alarm Power alarm GND Smoke alarm Smoke alarm GND Door alarm Door alarm GND Heat Exchanger/Fans alarm Heat Exchanger/Fans alarm GND Not connected
3.2. DIP Switches

Figure 3 shows the location of the alarm DIP switches S1 to S5.
Figure 3. DIP Switches on the APUA Board Figure 3 shows the alarm settings for DIP switches S1 to S5. S1 and S2 are configured to control power alarms, S3 to control smoke alarms, S4 to control door alarms, and S5 to control Heat Exchanger/Fan alarms. When the line is used, the corresponding switch should be set to OFF and when the line is not in use, the switch should be set to ON. For example, when Rectifier 3 is not in use, switches S1/3 and S2/2 should be set to ON (alarm not in use). Figure 4 and Figure 5 present the DIP switches and alarms in Nokia Extratalk AC/DC and Nokia Extratalk AC/AC.
Figure 4. DIP Switches and Alarms in Extratalk AC/DC

Figure 5. DIP Switches and Alarms in Extratalk AC/AC
3.3. Rear Connector Pins

The rear connector of the APUA provides connections for power supply and alarm signals as shown in Table 2, Table 3 and Table 4. Figure 6 presents the rear connector pins.
Figure 6. Rear Connector Pins Table 2.

Dip Row a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Rear Connector Row A

EAC Signal INT_AL60 INT_AL11 INT_AL10 INT_AL53 INT_AL54 Signal Name in MMI Extratalk AC/DC Cab. door open SUP1 Charging failure Backup Battery Low Extratalk Extension Extratalk AC/AC Cab. door open SUP1 Charging failure Backup Battery Low
S 1/5
Temperature high alarm Fault in HCU_3 unit
Temperature high alarm Fault in HCU_3 unit
S 4/1 S 3/2 S 5/1 S 2/1 S 3/1 S 1/1 S 1/2 S 1/3 S 2/2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
INT_AL61 INT_AL57 INT_AL58 INT_AL34 INT_AL64 INT_AL65 INT_AL9 INT_AL43 INT_AL45 INT_AL47 48 VGND
Cab. door open SUP2 Temperature high alarm Fault in HCU_4 unit Charging failure Smoke alarm CAB3 Smoke alarm CAB4 Mains breakdown Mains breakdown Mains breakdown Charging failure
Cab. door open SUP2 Temperature high alarm Fault in HCU_4 unit BBUE inverter overload Smoke alarm CAB3 Smoke alarm CAB4 Mains breakdown Battery failure Not used Not used
Table 3.
Dip Row b 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Rear Connector Row B

EAC Signal HUB _AL0 HUB _AL1 HUB _AL2 HUB _AL3 HUB _AL4 HUB _AL5 HUB _AL6 HUB _AL7 HUB _AL8 HUB _AL9 Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Signal Name in MMI Extratalk AC/DC Extratalk Extension Extratalk AC/AC
S 1/4 S 2/3 S 3/3 S 3/4 S 4/2 S 4/3 S 4/4 S 4/5 S 5/2 S 5/3
AC Input overvoltage Defined by customer Defined by customer Defined by customer Defined by customer Defined by customer Telecom interc. box Aircraft warning light Defined by customer Defined by customer
AC Input overvoltage Defined by customer Defined by customer Defined by customer Defined by customer Defined by customer Telecom interc. box Aircraft warning light Defined by customer Defined by customer
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND -
Table 4.
Dip Row c 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Rear Connector Row C

EAC Signal Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND Alarm GND -48 VDC Signal Name in MMI Extratalk AC/DC Extratalk Extension Extratalk AC/AC
4. TECHNICAL DATA
Table 5.
Height

262 mm (10.5 in)
Width Depth Weight
25 mm (1 in) 280 mm (11 in) 0,4 kg (0.9 lb)
Table 6.
Input Voltage Input Current Peak Current
Electrical Values
-40 ... -60 VDC nominal 0.1 A 0.4 A
BBUC Battery Backup Unit for GSM 900/1800/1900, B6Z 465298AE/5.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main features and functions, functional blocks, and external interfaces of the Battery Backup Unit (BBUC). The BBUC is used in the Nokia Extratalk AC/DC GSM 900/1800/1900 cabinet to produce power from 230 VAC for the DC power supply units of the Base Transceiver Station (BTS) and to charge the batteries. During a mains breakdown the power to the BTS is taken from the batteries via the DCUA.
Figure 1. BBUC Mechanics Outline
2.1. Features
The BBUC is protected against short circuit, overvoltage and overheat. The efficiency of the unit is more than 85 per cent and the power factor is over 0.9. The EMI/RFI complies with EN 55022 class B, and the EMC complies with IEC 801. Three BBUC units can be connected in parallel.
2.2. Operation
The BBUC is used to ensure the power supply when the mains power supply breaks down. The module is capable of producing power for the following: the battery module, the common units (2 x TRU, 2 x BCF, 5 x CCF), options (2 x DMR18 - 38I, DMR18-38S, STM) and for 2 x TRX, RMU, and RTC.
Figure 2. BBUC Block Diagram The input voltage is connected to the BBUC through a mains filter, an inrush current limiter and a rectifier. To improve the power factor, the rectifier is followed by a Power Factor Correction (PFC) preregulator. The PFC preregulator supplies the DC/DC power switcher which generates and regulates the temperature compensated and isolated output voltage. The input control monitors the input voltage and generates an input alarm signal when the input is out of range. The Rectifier Interface board (RIF) operates as an interface to the System Interface board (SIF).
There are three interfaces on the front panel of the BBUC unit: AC input DC output control and alarm connector input fuse (10 A)
Figure 3. BBUC Front Panel Interfaces Table 1.

Pin 1
Pin Configuration of Control and Alarm Connector
Description BBU Control
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Automatic load sharing Temperature compensation by SIF Temperature compensation by SIF Mains breakdown/temperature alarm Rectifier fault alarm Temperature compensation by SMT/60-30 Temperature compensation by SMT/60-30 Temperature compensation by SMT/60-30
4. TECHNICAL DATA
4.1. Input and Output Voltages
Table 2.
Input voltage (AC) Output voltage (DC)
BBUC Input and Output Voltages

208 - 240 V (184 - 276 V) 54.3 V (at 25C / 77F)

Table 3.
Dimensions and Weight of the BBU

142 mm (5.6 in) 262 mm (10.3 in) 350 mm (13.8 in) 10.8 kg (23.8. lb)

The BBUC DC output is protected against overvoltage. In overvoltage situations the logic cuts off the power supply to the output. The overvoltage protection logic is reset by switching off the input voltage.
GSM 900/GSM 1800 Battery Backup Unit BBUE, B6Z 466068AE/3.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main features and functions, functional blocks, and external interfaces of the Battery Backup Unit (BBUE). The BBUE is used in the Nokia Extratalk GSM 900/GSM 1800 AC/AC cabinet to produce power from 230 VAC for the AC power supply units of the Base Transceiver Station (BTS) and DC power for the transmission equipment during normal operation. During mains breakdown power is taken from the batteries.
Figure 1. BBUE Mechanics Outline
2.1. Features
The BBUE is protected against short circuit, overvoltage and overheat. The efficiency of the unit is more than 85 per cent. The power factor is over 0.9.
The BBUE fulfils the EMI (RFI) requirement EN 55022 class B, and the EMC requirement IEC 801. The BBUE fulfils the safety requirement EN 50091-1.
2.2. Operation
BBUE and external 48 V battery forms a battery backed up 48 VDC and 230 VAC power supply. When 230 V mains voltage is present, the BBUE charges the batteries and supplies DC loads. DC loads are connected directly to the battery. The AC output is connected to the AC input through an internal bypass relay. There are two chargers in the BBUE. Normally they charge the battery and supply DC loads at half power. If one charger fails, the other one begins to charge with full power. When there is no mains voltage or the voltage or frequency deviates too much from nominal values, the BBUE disconnects the AC output from mains supply and begins to supply 230 VAC voltage by taking power from the battery. DC power is taken directly from the battery. In addition, the BBUE controls the deep-discharge relay and the AC output relay. It monitors the external distribution fuses and the deep-discharge relay, tests the battery periodically and issues alarms. 2.2.1. Blocks
Figure 2. BBUE Block Diagram Control Board

Control Board The control board controls the main functions of the BBUE. It measures the incoming supply voltage and controls whether the battery supply should be taken into use instead of mains supply and vice versa. The control board also issues the necessary control signals to the other boards. The control board controls the operation of the inverters when the battery supply is used. The control board monitors the operation of the batteries and sends them the fine tuning data for temperature compensation and load sharing. The control board also controls the testing of the inverters and the battery. Interface Board The interface board carries out the galvanic isolation, filtering and protection of the control and alarm signals connected via the D-connector. Power Board The BBUE has two parallel power boards. If one of the boards becomes faulty, the other continues to operate as a charger. Power board has three main parts: 1. 2. 3. Rectifier (bi-directional DC/DC converter) Inverter/power factor correction preregulator (bi-directional DC/AC converter) Internal power source
Battery Filter The battery filter filters the high-frequency interferences in the battery line. Mains Filter The mains filter filters the high frequency interferences in the 230 V line. Isolation Transformers Two 2 kVA isolation transformers galvanically isolate the mains power supply from the battery and change the voltage level.
There are four interfaces located on the front panel of the BBUE unit: AC input AC output Control and alarm connector DC supply
Figure 3. BBUE Front Panel Interfaces Table 1.

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 119
Pin Configuration of Control and Alarm Connector

Description Deep discharge relay control AC output relay control Fuse monitoring Fuse monitoring Fuse monitoring Fuse monitoring Fuse monitoring Battery fuse aux. contact Deep discharge relay aux. contact Temperature sensor: input +5V for battery test control +5V for inverter off control Cold start control from HCU Unit failure alarm Mains break down alarm Common alarm GND Pin 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Description -48VDC for relay controls Fuse monitoring Fuse monitoring Fuse monitoring Fuse monitoring Fuse monitoring Battery fuse aux. contact Deep discharge relay aux. contact Temperature sensor: GND Temperature sensor: +Vcc BBUE Battery test control Inverter off control +5V for cold start control Backup battery low alarm Overload alarm Battery failure alarm
4. TECHNICAL DATA
4.1. Input and Output Voltages
Table 2.
Input voltage (AC): Input voltage (DC): Output voltage (AC): Output voltage (DC):
BBUE Input and Output Voltages

230V (180-200...270V, lower level is adjustable) 48V (supply from external battery during mains breakdown) 230V 54V (at 25C, Challenger battery) 54,5V (at 25C, GNB battery)

Table 3.
Dimensions and Weight of the BBUE

426 mm (16,8 in) 262 mm (10,3 in) 395 mm (15,6 in) 60 kg (132,3 lb)
Base Control Function Unit BCFA, B6Z 465228AE/4.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main functions and features, functional blocks, and interfaces of the Base Control Function unit (BCFA). The BCFA is the BTS level common controlling unit. The BCFA includes operation and maintenance (O&M) functions such as BTS initialising, configuring, and alarm handling. It also generates the time base for the system and controls both baseband and synthesised frequency hopping. The BCFA is a one-board plug-in unit with two backplane connectors.
Figure 1. BCFA Mechanics Outline
2.1. Features
Self-tests The unit is able to test itself to detect and locate possible defects of the unit. MMI The unit has an interface for the user to communicate with the main processor and thus for controlling the whole BTS. Downloadable SW All the SW of the BTS can be downloaded through the BCFA either from the A-bis or from the MMI interface. Redundant unit The BCFA can be used in BTS as a normal unit or as a redundant unit. This choice depends on the location of the unit in BTS. As a redundant unit, the BCFA provides backup for the13 MHz master clock. Display A four-digit display under the control of the main processor indicates the current status of the BTS. Synchronisable OCXO The timing generation can be set to be adjusted according to the A-bis reference.
2.2. Operation
The BCFA provides the control functions that are common to all BTS units. The BCFA executes the SW downloading from the BSC or the MMI and uploads the SW to other BTS units. During the software downloading the BCFA indicates the progress on its front panel display. The BTS configuration data is also downloaded to the BCFA unit. The BCFA detects unit alarms and performs recovery actions. In certain situations the BCFA
performs a self-reset.
2.3. Main Blocks

The BCFA includes the O&M functions, the main clock functions, the handling of the external alarm and control signals, and frequency hopping control.
Figure 2. Main Functional Parts of BCFA O&M processor The main BTS processor performs the O&M communication via the network and the MMI, and controls the BTS units via the D-bus. It downloads the BTS SW via D-bus or the MMI, and stores it in non-volatile memory. A four-digit display under the control of the main processor indicates the current status of the BTS. External Alarms and Controls (EAC) The EAC collects alarms from the units in the BTS and from sources defined by the customer. The EAC also provides several outputs for control purposes. Master Clock Generator (MCLG) The MCLG generates the accurate 13 MHz master clock for the BTS. Other common clock signals (in Figure 5) are also derived from this reference and distributed to other units. Frequency Hopping Bus Controller (FHBC)
The FHBC is a processor that calculates the frequency hopping algorithm and controls the transceivers through a specific parallel bus (F-bus).
3.1. O&M Processor
Figure 3. Functional Blocks of O&M Processor The O&M processor part is the main BTS controlling processor. It utilises of a 32-bit processing environment with several types of memory (DPRAM, DRAM, and flash). The processor has an internal bus to communicate with other parts of the unit. The O&M processor's main functions are the following: testing all its interfaces and performing loop tests with BTS units uploading its own SW and the unit SW from the BSC or the MMI, and saves the SW files to
a non-volatile flash memory for uploading to units initialising all BTS units detecting unit alarms and performing any necessary recovery operations providing a user interface (MMI) to control the operation of the O&M processor (and therefore the BTS) supervising and adjusting the master clock. The O&M processor measures the drift of the main Oven Compensated Crystal Oscillator (OCXO) and adjusts the frequency when necessary monitoring the alarms from the other units and from sources defined by the customer switching the cabinet cooling fans ON when necessary controlling the ON/OFF outputs according to the customer-defined configuration uploading, configuring, and initialising the FHDSP SW after reset tracing system operation via SW handling O&M A-bis signalling with the BSC indicating the status of the BTS via the front panel display and LEDs
3.2. External Alarms and Controls (EAC)
Figure 4. Functional Parts of EAC The O&M processor can read and control the status of the BTS units through the registers in the EAC. The EAC connects a number of digital inputs and outputs to and from the other BTS units. The EAC also contains analog inputs which the processor can read through an analog-to-digital converter. Some of the inputs and outputs are reserved for user-defined purposes. The interfaces are protected against overvoltage.
3.3. Master Clock Generator (MCLG)
Figure 5. Functional Parts of MCLG The main functions of the MCLG are the following: generating the BTS timing using a 26 MHz OCXO: all other clocks that are distributed to other units are derived from this main clock OCXO adjustment through the D/A converter (DAC). The timing of the A-bis clock comes
via the D-bus. fine tuning the timing with reference to the A-bis clock with the aid of the Clock Signal Comparator auto-incrementing Frame Number (FN) register which delivers the FN to other units
3.4. Frequency Hopping Bus Controller (FHBC)
Figure 6. Functional Parts of FHBC The FHBC controls the F-bus which connects the BBMA modules. This block mainly consists of a DSP processor environment which controls the F-bus through FIFO and interface circuits. The FHBC controls the loading of FHDSP SW and parameters required in hopping from the main processor. The main SW functions for the FHDSP are the following: Hopping sequence calculation: according to GSM 05.02 for all TRXs based on hopping parameters received from main processor
Control of F-bus traffic:

baseband or synthesiser hopping control through the F-bus F-bus address generation for the BBMA DSP parts RF channel number calculation and transfer to all TRXs
O&M functions: F-bus HW alarm monitoring parameter and alarm signalling with the O&M processor frame number checking self-tests
4.1. Front Panel
The BCFA front panel has the following interfaces: 9-pin D-connector for the MMI 15-pin D-connector for the RTC SMB connector for master clock measurement SMB connector for frame synchronisation monitoring four-digit display to show the BTS status three LEDs indicating the state of the unit reset switch MMI Connector Pin Configuration
Signal DCD RX TX DTR GND DSR
Table 1.
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9
RTS CTS not used
Table 2.
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
RTC Connector Pin Configuration

Signal TDAT2_2P RDAT2_2P CK2M_2P DGND VCC VCC DGND 2MHZ_P TDAT2_2N RDAT2_2N CK2M_2N not used DGND DGND 2MHZ_N
4.2. Rear Connectors

Euroconnectors X1 and X3 connect the unit to the backplane. Table 3.
Pin 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 a VCC VCC VCC INT_CO0 INT_CO2 INT_CO4 INT_CO6 INT_CO8 INT_CO10 INT_CO12 EXT_CO1 EXT_CO3 EXT_CO5 INT_AL1 INT_AL3 INT_AL5 INT_AL7 INT_AL9 INT_AL11 INT_AL13
X1 Pin Configuration
b VCC VCC INT_AL88 INT_CO1 INT_CO3 INT_CO5 INT_CO7 INT_CO9 INT_CO11 EXT_CO0 EXT_CO2 EXT_CO4 INT_AL0 INT_AL2 INT_AL4 INT_AL6 INT_AL8 INT_AL10 INT_AL12 INT_AL14 c DGND DGND not used AGND AGND AGND AGND AGND AGND AGND not used DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND d VCC VCC INT_AL89 AGND +12V -12V AGND M2RF_P M2RF_N AGND not used DGND M13RO_P DGND M13RO_N DGND M13O_P DGND M13O_N DGND e VCC VCC INT_AL90 AGND +12V -12V AGND AGND AGND AGND not used DGND M13RI_P DGND M13RI_N DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
INT_AL15 INT_AL17 INT_AL19 INT_AL21 INT_AL23 INT_AL25 INT_AL27 INT_AL29 INT_AL31 INT_AL33 INT_AL35 +5V +5V VCC VCC VCC VCC
INT_AL16 INT_AL18 INT_AL20 INT_AL22 INT_AL24 INT_AL26 INT_AL28 INT_AL30 INT_AL32 INT_AL34 INT_AL36 INT_AL56 INT_AL57 INT_AL58 INT_AL59 VCC VCC
DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND OVGND OVGND DGND DGND DGND DGND
EXT_AL0 EXT_AL2 EXT_AL4 EXT_AL6 EXT_AL8 EXT_AL10 EXT_AL12 EXT_AL14 EXT_AL16 EXT_AL18 EXT_AL20 V12P V12P INT_AL78 INT_AL79 VCC VCC
EXT_AL1 EXT_AL3 EXT_AL5 EXT_AL7 EXT_AL9 EXT_AL11 EXT_AL13 EXT_AL15 EXT_AL17 EXT_AL19 EXT_AL21 EXT_AL22 EXT_AL23 VCC VCC VCC VCC
Table 4.
Pin 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 a
X3 Pin Configuration
b VCC VCC INT_AL60 INT_AL61 FCK_N FNO_N TDAT1_1N RDAT1_N SYNC_N TDAT2_1N RDAT2_1N CK2M_1N DB0_N DB1_N DB2_N DB3_N DB4_N DB5_N DB6_N DB7_N AD_N TR_N FBCK_N INT_CO23 RDAT1 RDAT2 SYNC PWR0 OMOUT INT_AL62 INT_AL63 INT_AL64 c DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND d VCC VCC INT_AL70 INT_CO13 INT_CO14 INT_CO15 INT_CO16 INT_CO17 INT_AL37 INT_AL38 INT_AL39 INT_AL40 INT_AL41 INT_AL42 INT_AL43 INT_AL44 INT_AL45 INT_AL46 INT_AL47 INT_AL71 INT_AL72 INT_AL73 INT_AL74 INT_AL75 VSWR3 VSWR4 VSWR0 VSWR2 CBTS TDO_BCFA TCK TRST e VCC VCC VCC VCC INT_AL80 INT_CO18 INT_CO19 INT_CO20 INT_CO21 INT_AL48 INT_AL49 INT_AL50 INT_AL51 INT_AL52 INT_AL53 INT_AL54 INT_AL55 INT_AL81 INT_AL82 INT_AL83 INT_AL84 INT_AL85 INT_AL86 INT_AL87 VSWR5 VSWR6 VSWR1 M13SR UA0 TMS TDI_BCFA AUX_RES
VCC VCC VCC VCC FCK_P FNO_P TDAT1_1P RDAT1_P SYNC_P TDAT2_1P RDAT2_1P CK2M_1P DB0_P DB1_P DB2_P DB3_P DB4_P DB5_P DB6_P DB7_P AD_P TR_P FBCK_P INT_CO22 TDAT1 TDAT2 CK2M PWR1 OMIN INT_CO24 INT_CO25 INT_AL68
34 35 36 37 38
INT_AL69 VCC VCC VCC VCC
INT_AL65 INT_AL66 INT_AL67 VCC VCC
DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND
HOLD INT_AL76 INT_AL77 VCC VCC
FAIL VCC VCC VCC VCC
4.3. Signalling Speed Jumper Connector

The O&M signalling speed can be set to 16 K or 64K by selecting the appropriate jumper position in connector X1701. Default setting is AUTO as shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7. Jumper Connector X1701
4.4. Test Jumper Connector

Connector X301 (shown in Figure 7) is for service test purposes only. This jumper must remain in the
Connector X301 (shown in Figure 7) is for service test purposes only. This jumper must remain in the open position.
5. TECHNICAL DATA
Table 5.
Dimensions and Weights

233.35 mm (9.2 in) 30 mm (1.2 in) 280 mm (11 in) 0.6 kg (1.3 lb)
5.2. Power Consumption

Table 6.
Voltage [V] +5 (Vcc) +12 -12
Power Consumption
I [A] 2.0 0.2 0.01 P [W] 10 2.4 0.1

The BTS external alarm inputs are protected against +/- 30 VDC continuous overvoltage. All user-defined external alarm inputs are protected against +/- 75 VDC continuous overvoltage. All external alarm interface inputs can be short circuited to ground. The analog inputs have a diode protection. The unit front panel is connected to the equipment ground for electrostatic discharges. The power supply lines are protected against damages in case of accidental cross connection.
The unit is sensitive to electromagnetic charges. The user should take care of proper grounding when handling the unit. The unit must be handled with care: inappropriate handling may damage the LCD display on the front panel. The unit is equipped with handles that can be used for lifting and for installing or removing the unit.
Heat Exchanger BHXA/BHXB, B6Z 467730AE/2.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the heat exchanger units BHXA and BHXB. The BHXA is used in the Nokia Citytalk cabinet and BHXB in Extratalk cabinet in GSM 900, GSM 1800, and GSM 1900 applications to maintain the cabinet temperature on an acceptable level for the radio equipment.
Figure 1. Citytalk/Extratalk Heat Exchanger
The material used in the heat exchanger mechanics is mainly aluminium. The principal components of the heat exchanger are fans and a recuperator.
There are two centrifugal fans both in BHXA and BHXB; the inner air circuit fan and the outer air circuit fan. The BHXB includes an additional axial fan for the battery compartment cooling, thus the total number of fans in the BHXB is three.
Figure 2. BHXA and BHXB
3. OPERATION
The heat exchanger monitors the temperature of the air flow within the BTS cabinet to ensure the internal air remains within the operating range. The functions of the heat exchanger are controlled by the external Heat Control Unit (HCU). The internal fan circulates the air within the BTS cabinet and heat exchanger. The external fan draws external air in, as the temperature demands, through the recuperator to aid the heat exchanger function. On the basis of the return air temperature from the cabinet the controller will adjust the cooling capacity in accordance with the actual need. As the temperature increases the internal fan starts to operate at low speed. At further increasing return air temperature the internal fan accelerates and later also the external fan so that heat is removed by the heat exchanger. The internal air flow is forced vertically by the internal fan through the recuperator and circulated through the BTS plug-in units. This air flow is recirculated through the recuperator in the heat exchanger again. Any excess heat is transferred to the recuperator when the air flow is forced through the recuperator. This air is expelled from the heat exchanger by the fan. Refer to Figure 3.
Figure 3. The Air Circuits inside the Cabinet The recuperator unit is central to the function of the heat exchanger and is able to transfer heat from the internal air circuit to the external circuit as the temperature demands. Refer to Figure 4.
Figure 4. Internal and External Air Circulation The vertical and horizontal air flow circuits are isolated by the walls of the recuperator and never meet. The heat exchangers used with Nokia Citytalk and Nokia Extratalk do not include a heater, because it is a part of the cabinet.
4.1. DC Supply
DC (41 to 48 VDC 1 VDC) is supplied via a plug through the assembly plate. The BHX_ has a D 13W3 male connector mounted on the front. The cabinet DC connector is shown in Figure 5 and the pins are detailed in Table 1.
Figure 5. DC Supply Connector in the Cabinet Table 1.

Pin A1 A2 A3 1 2 3 4 5
DC Connector Pins
Purpose Output (+) for both heat exchanger fans Output (-) for the internal fan of the heat exchanger Output (-) for the internal fan of the heat exchanger Output (+) for the battery room fan (BHXB) Output (-) for the battery room fan (BHXB) Hall detector signal of the battery room fan (BHXB) Hall detector signal of the external heat exchanger fan Hall detector signal of the external heat exchanger fan
5. TECHNICAL DATA
5.1. Power Supply
Table 2. Output DC Voltage Range
Battery Room Fan -48 VDC (1 V) nominal Total peak current 0.2A for 1 second.
Heat Exchanger Fans -41 VDC (1 V) to -48 VDC (1 V) nominal Total peak current 9A for 3 seconds.
The power consumption of BHXA/BHXB is 130W approximately.

Table 3.
Weight Height Width Depth
Heat Exchanger Dimensions and Weight

45 kg 1135.5 mm 770 mm 332 mm 99.2 lb 44.7 in 30.3 in 13.1 in

The heat exchanger must be stored in an upright position. The fan at the front and the air inlet at the rear are vulnerable.The heat exchanger must not be laid down on its front side as this may damage the fan. If necessary, you can lay the heat exchanger down carefully down on its rear side so that there is a support underneath protecting the air inlet as shown in Figure 6.
Figure 6. Heat Exchanger Storage and Handling Removing and installing the heat exchanger requires two people. The optional lifting handles (LIFA) should be used for lifting and carrying. You can use one or more optional lifting handles. The fixing point alternatives for LIFA are presented in Figure 7.
Figure 7. Heat Exchanger Lifting Handle Fixing Points
Cabinet Cooling Fan CCFA, B6Z 465218AE/5.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
The Cabinet Cooling Fan Unit (CCFA) is used to force air to flow around the plug-in units in order to maintain the internal cabinet temperature within the predefined limits. The CCFA is used in the Nokia Intratalk and Nokia Citytalk BTS cabinets in GSM 900/GSM 1800/GSM 1900 applications. This document describes the main features and functions, functional blocks, and external interfaces of the CCFA.
Figure 1. CCFA Mechanics Outline
2.1. Features
The CCFA is a plug-in unit with changeable fan modules, facilitating easy installation and maintenance. The CCFA has the following main features: selectable input voltage via a jumper setting on the CCFA control board enables the unit to
selectable input voltage via a jumper setting on the CCFA control board enables the unit to operate from either a 24 V (GSM 1800) or 26 V (GSM 900/GSM 1900) supply control logic to monitor that the control input is operational alarm logic to supervise the operating voltage, the control logic, and the operation of the unit short circuit and overvoltage protection circuitry fan rotation control self-test facility that does not disrupt the operation of the BTS
2.2. Operation
The CCFA unit consists of two fans, a control board, and mechanics. The fans circulate air to keep the temperature inside the cabinet constant. The CCFA can operate either independently, according to values pre-set by dip switches on the unit control board, or controlled by an external signal. The unit is controlled by the Base Control Function unit (BCF) in the Intratalk BTS, and the BCF and the Heat Control Unit (HCU) in the Citytalk BTS. The CCFAs are installed in groups of three in Intratalk cabinet applications. In order to prevent an excessive peak in-rush current demand, the units are chained together so that when power is applied to a chain the start-up time between the individual CCFA units is staggered (Control Out signal, see Figure 2). The delay between the second fan in a unit rotating and the first fan in the next unit starting to rotate is approximately 3 seconds. The operation of the CCFA control logic and fans can be checked by pressing the front panel test button for 5 seconds. Once the button is depressed, the fans start rotating and the red alarm LED illuminates. The alarm LED extinguishes when the fans reach their set speed. If the alarm LED remains extinguished the CCFA is operating correctly.
Figure 2. Block Diagram of the CCFA DC/DC converters are used to derive the +5V required for the logic and the 18V operating voltage for the fans from the 24V/26V input voltage. The control signal connection is on the control board at the rear of the unit.
The CCFA front panel is equipped with two LEDs, a test button, and a fuse socket (1.6 A). The rear connector of the CCFA is an Euroconnector and provides connections for power supply, alarm signals, and control signals as shown in Figure 3.
Figure 3. CCFA Rear Connector Figure 4 shows the location and default settings of dip switch S1 and jumper connector X6.
Figure 4. CCFA Jumper Connectors
4. TECHNICAL DATA
Table 1.

66 mm (2.6 in) 137 mm (5.4 in) 354 mm (14 in) 1.9 kg (4.2 lb)
Table 2.
Input Voltage Input Current Peak Current Fuse Air Volume
Electrical Values
+24 V / 26 VDC nominal 0.35 A 0.9 A T 1.6 A 160 m3/h/fan
Cabinet Cooling Fan CCFC, H6Z 465646AE/4.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
The main function of the Cabinet Cooling Fan Unit (CCFC) is to force air to circulate within the indoor versions of the Nokia Flexitalk BTS cabinet in order to maintain a constant temperature inside the cabinet within the specified operational temperature range. This document describes the main functions, features and interfaces of the CCFC. Figure 1 shows the mechanical outline of the unit whilst Figure 2 shows the front panel.
Figure 1. CCFC Mechanical Outline
Figure 2. Unit Front Panel
2.1. Features
The CCFC is a plug-in unit designed for easy installation and low maintenance. The CCFC unit can be operated from either a 24 V (GSM 1800), or a 26 V (GSM 900) input voltage. The input voltage is selected via a jumper setting on the CCFC control board. The CCFC alarm logic supervises the operating voltage, the control logic and the correct functioning of the unit. The rotation of the fans is monitored by a rotation sensor. The CCFC unit is equipped with a test button used for checking the control logic and the fans without disturbing the normal BTS operation. The CCFC has an LED display to indicate either normal or fault conditions.
2.2. Operation
The CCFC unit consists of five axial fans, a control module and the mechanics. The fans circulate the air inside the cabinet to maintain a constant temperature. The CCFC is controlled by external signals from the BCFA unit. There is a connection between the control unit and the CCFC. The fans are turned on one by one, to minimise the current required by the CCFC at start-up. The CCFC control starts each fan in sequence, each start-up is separated by a delay of 2.5 seconds. This cycle continues until all five fans are running. The operation of the CCFC control logic and fans can be checked by pressing the test button for approximately 15 seconds. When the button is pressed, the red LED illuminates (located on unit's front panel) and the first fan starts rotating. After 2.5 seconds the second fan starts rotating, then the third, fourth and fifth. When all the fans are rotating, the red LED is extinguished and the green LED illuminates (located on unit's front panel) to indicate normal operation.
Figure 3. Block Diagram The +5 Volts required for the logic and the +24 V operating voltage is converted from the 24 V/26 V DC input voltage. The control signal connection is on the control board located at the rear of the unit. The alarm signal (Alarm Out) is delayed for a period of 12 seconds to allow for the fans' normal start-up signal The fan block in the unit contains five fans.
3.1. Jumper Settings

There are two, three pin header jumpers located on the side of the Control Board, X10 and X11. They provide the following options:
Figure 4. Control Module Jumper Settings Table 1.

Jumper X10
CCFC Jumper Settings

Setting 1,2 2,3 Function 26V operation (GSM 900) 24V operation (GSM 1800) Fans on continuously Normal fan operation
X11
1,2 2,3
The CCFC front panel ( refer to Figure 2) is equipped with: 2 LEDs; Test button; Fuse socket.
The CCFC Control Module provides the connections for the power supply, alarm signals, and the control signals. Figure 5 details the CCFC interface connector.
Figure 5. CCFC Control Module
5. TECHNICAL DATA
Table 2. CCFC Dimensions and Weight
63 x 460.5 x 334 mm 5 kg
Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) Weight
Table 3.
Input Voltage Input Current
CCFC Electrical Values

+24 V/26 V DC nominal 0.4 A
Peak Current Fuse Air Volume
1.0 A T 2.0 A 41 L/s per fan
Power Supply for Common Units CSU, B6Z 465981AE/4.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main features and functions, the functional blocks and the external interfaces of the CSU. There are two different kinds of CSU units which produce power for the Base Transceiver Station (BTS) common units. The CSUA is the DC Power Supply Unit which converts 48 VDC or 60 VDC input voltage into appropriate operating voltages and the CSUB is the AC Power Supply Unit which converts 230 VAC input voltage into operating voltages.
Figure 1. CSU Mechanics Outline
2.1. Features
The CSU is a single-board plug-in unit with two rear connectors. It has the following features: it can be switched on and off with an external remote control signal when necessary power outputs are equipped with short circuit protection it is equipped with overheat protection The CSUA is capable of using either 48 VDC or 60 VDC input voltage. The input voltage range is selected with a jumper on the BTS backplane.
2.2. Operation
The CSUA provides power for the BTS common units. It converts the 48 VDC or 60 VDC input voltage into isolated 24 V, +12 V, -12 V, and 5 V output voltages. The CSUB power supply unit provides power for the BTS common units. It converts the 230 VAC input voltage into isolated 24 V, +12 V, -12 V, and 5 V output voltages. Other main functions of the CSU unit are: to monitor the CSU input voltage and to send a mains alarm to the BCF when the input voltage is out of range to monitor the CSU output voltages and currents and send an output alarm to the BCF if any of the output voltages fall below the specified limit to monitor the CSU output voltages. If any of the output voltages exceeds the specified overvoltage protection limit, the CSU unit disconnects power supply to all outputs and sends an output alarm to the BCF. The overvoltage protection logic is reset by switching the unit off. to monitor the temperature of the CSU unit and to switch the unit off and to send a mains alarm to the BCF if the unit temperature exceeds the specified limit
2.3. Main Blocks

The CSU consists of three functional blocks: the power input block, the power switcher block and the control block.
Figure 2. CSU Block Diagram 2.3.1. Power Input Block The CSUA power input block consists of an input circuit and a step-up converter. The input circuit filters the input voltage and limits the inrush current. The step-up converter then converts the filtered input voltage into a stabilized intermediate voltage for the power switcher block. The CSUB power input block consists of an input circuit and a Power Factor Correction (PFC) preregulator. The input voltage is first fed through the input circuit that consists of a mains filter, an inrush current limiter and a rectifier. To improve the power factor, the input voltage is then fed through the PFC preregulator which converts a stabilized intermediate voltage for the power switcher block. The power input block also includes a DC/DC converter providing operating voltage for the control block. 2.3.2. Power Switcher Block The power switcher block consists of switched-mode circuits which convert the intermediate voltage into the isolated 5 V, +12 V, -12 V, and 24 V output voltages. 2.3.3. Control Block The control block consists of an input control circuit and an output control circuit which monitor and control the operation of the CSU power supply. The control block takes care of the over and undervoltage protection, overcurrent protection, overheat protection, unit synchronization, alarm signal generation, and the unit front panel LED control. It also processes the control signal received from the BCF.
The CSU is equipped with the following interfaces: Front panel (See Figure 1): three LEDs On/Stand-by switch
Rear panel: two Euroconnectors
The colours and explanations of the front panel LEDs are given in Table 1.
Table 1.
Colour Red Yellow Green
CSUA Front Panel LEDs

Code FLT ALM OPR Explanation Failure Alarm Normal operation
The CSU rear connectors provide connections for the power input and output, control signal input and output, and alarm signal output. A general description of the CSUA rear connector pin configurations is given in Figure 3 and a general description of the CSUB rear connector pin configurations is given in Figure 4.
Figure 3. CSUA Rear Connectors
Figure 4. CSUB Rear Connectors
4. TECHNICAL DATA
efficiency > 70 % EMI/RFI complies with EN 55022 cl. B, FCC Rules Part 15 EMC complies with IEC 801, Bellcore GR-1089 safety complies with EN 60950, UL 1950 (third edition)
4.1. CSU Input and Output Voltages

Table 2. CSU Input Voltages
48 V (40.5 ... 57 V) 60 V (50 ... 75 V) 230 V (208...240 V)
CSUA Input voltage, floating (DC) CSUB Input voltage (AC)
The DC input voltage range 48 V/60 V is selected with a jumper on the BTS backplane. Table 3.
Output No. Output Voltage (DC) Maximum Current
CSU Output Voltages and Corresponding Maximum Currents

1 5.0 ... 5.2 V 0 ... 15.0 A 2 11.9 ... 12.3 V 0 ... 2.0 A 3 -11.8 ... -12.2 V 0 ... 1.3 A 4 23.0 ... 25.0 V 0 ... 2.6 A

Table 4.
CSU Dimensions and Weight

262 mm (10.3 in) 37 mm (1.5 in) 308 mm (12.1 in) 2.5 kg (5.5 lb)

The power outputs of the CSU are protected against overvoltage.

Caution: The unit is sensitive to electromagnetic charges. The user should take care of proper grounding and wear an antistatic hand strap when handling the unit.
DC Connection Unit DCUA/C/D, B6Z 465798AE/3.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main functions, features, and the interfaces of DC Connection Unit (DCU). The DCU is not a plug-in unit. It acts as a junction block in the Nokia Extratalk cabinet to distribute DC power to the BTS and the Extratalk cabinet. The DCUA is for GSM 900 and GSM 1800 applications whereas DCUD is for GSM 1900 applications. The form, fit and function of the two variants is identical. The DCUC is used in Nokia Extratalk AC/AC applications.
Figure 1. DCU Mechanical Outline
2.1. Features
As a solid part of the Extratalk cabinet, the DCU is not dependent on variations in configurations. The DCU has both ampere and voltage measuring points for the 48 VDC operating voltage. The power to the measuring points is lead from (+) and (-) busbars. The measurement can be carried out by a regular multimeter. As an option, a Digital Dual Meter (DDMA) can be assembled on the front panel of the DCU.
2.2. Operation of DCUA/D

Figure 2 illustrates the DCUA/D's interfaces with other units in Nokia Extratalk.
Figure 2. DCUA/D Block Diagram The 48V DC from each rectifier unit is input to the DCUA/D for distribution to the following: battery charging Heat Control Unit (HCUA) System Interface Unit (SIFA) Line Terminal Equipment (LTE) other cabinets
The DCUA/D also collects all alarms concerning DC voltage. The LTE supply is controlled by the HCUA. In a cold start or when the cabinet temperature rises above the specified level, the HCUA supplies voltage to the LTE relay (accommodated in the DCUA/D, see Figure 2) which switches off the LTEs. Once the cabinet temperature has stabilised to a predetermined level, the LTEs are switched back on. The DCUA/D also receives control signals from the SIFA unit which monitors the status of the deep discharge relay and the battery charge MCB (Mini Circuit Breaker). The SIFA also receives alarms from the DCUA/D. The DCUA/D supplies DC to the batteries. The battery voltage is monitored by the SIFA, and if the battery voltage drops below a predetermined level, the deep discharge relay will disconnect the batteries. The deep discharge relay protects the batteries against overdischarge damage. In battery backup operation, the DCUA/D supplies DC from the batteries to the BTS and the LTE units. DC supply voltage and current can be measured from the front panel plugs with a multimeter. A front panel switch provides the option of measuring the output DC supply or the battery charge.
2.3. Operation of DCUC

Figure 3 illustrates how the DCUC interfaces with other units in Nokia Extratalk.
Figure 3. DCUC Block Diagram The 48V DC from the BBUE unit is input to the DCUC for distribution to the following: battery charging Line Terminal Equipment (LTE)
The DCUC also collects alarms concerning DC voltage (except for the alarm from ACUC DC output fuse). The LTE supply is controlled by the HCUB. When the DCUC is switched on, the HCUB supplies voltage to the LTE relay (accommodated in the DCUC, see Figure 3) which switches off the LTEs. Once the cabinet temperature has stabilised to a predetermined level, the LTEs are switched back on. The DCUC also receives control signals from the BBUE which monitors the status of the deep discharge relay and the battery charge MCB (Mini Circuit Breaker). The BBUE also receives alarms from the DCUC.
The DCUC supplies DC to the batteries and from the batteries to the LTE units and the external DC outlet. The battery voltage is monitored by the BBUE, and if the battery voltage drops below a predetermined level, the deep discharge relay will disconnect the batteries. The deep discharge relay protects the batteries against overdischarge damage. Battery charging/discharging current and voltage can be measured from the front panel plugs with a multimeter. As an option, a Digital Dual Meter (DDMA) can be assembled on the front panel of the DCU. The meter can adjusted for the DCUC according to the instructions supplied with the DDMA.
3.1. DCUA/D
The DCUA/D front panel provides the following interfaces (see Figure 1): MCB-type 3 A fuses for LTE DC supplies sockets for LTE DC output MCB-type 100 A fuse for battery back-up MCB-type 100 A fuse for battery charging auxiliary switch for battery charging current measurement connectors voltage measurement connectors
The rear of the DCUA/D has the following interfaces: two sockets for 100 ADC input and output three sockets for 30 ADC input socket for DC output to HCUA socket for DC input from HCUA 15-pin D-connector socket outlet for alarms and controls socket for optional positive pole (+) grounding
The rear of the DCUA/D is shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4. DCUA/D Rear View Table 1.

Socket number S 01 S 02
DCUA/D Connections
Socket type Two-pin wall socket Two-pin wall socket Direction LTE feed LTE feed Line Type 54 VDC/3 A 54 VDC/3 A
S 03 S 04 S 05 S 06 S 50 S 51 S 52 S 53 S 54 S 55 S 56 S 57 S115
Two-pin wall socket Two-pin wall socket Two-pin wall socket Two-pin wall socket Two-pin wall socket Two-pin wall socket Two-pin DC socket Two-pin DC socket Two-pin DC socket Two-pin DC socket Two-pin DC socket 15-pin D-type connector Lead-through connector
LTE feed LTE feed LTE feed LTE feed from HCUA to DCUA/D from DCUA/D to HCUA from Rectifier to DCUA/D from Rectifier to DCUA/D from Rectifier to DCUA/D from DCUA/D to ACUA from DCUA/D to batteries from DCUA/D to SIFA from + busbar to cabinet body (optional)
54 VDC/3 A 54 VDC/3 A 54 VDC/3 A 54 VDC/3 A Control 54 VDC 54 VDC 54 VDC 54 VDC 54 VDC/90 A 54 VDC/90 A controls/alarms + grounding
3.2. DCUC
The DCUC front panel provides the following interfaces (see Figure 1): MCB-type fuses for LTE DC supplies, 5 pieces 3 A, one 6 A sockets for LTE DC output MCB-type 32 A fuse for external DC output MCB-type 125 A fuse for battery auxiliary switch for battery fuse current measurement connectors voltage measurement connectors
The rear of the DCUC has the following interfaces: socket for 125 ADC input/output socket for 32 ADC output socket for DC input from HCUB 25-pin D-connector socket for alarms and controls
The rear of the DCUC is shown in Figure 5.
Figure 5. DCUC Rear View Table 2.

Socket number A 01
DCUC Connections
Socket type Two-pin wall socket Direction LTE feed Line Type 54 VDC/3 A
A 02 A 03 A 04 A 05 A 06 A 108 A 164 A 113 A 112 A 114 A115
Two-pin wall socket Two-pin wall socket Two-pine wall socket Two-pin wall socket Two-pin wall socket Two-pin wall socket Two-pin DC socket Two-pin DC socket Two-pin DC socket 25-pin D-type connector Lead-through connector
LTE feed LTE feed LTE feed LTE feed LTE feed from HCUB to DCUC to ACUC from DCUC to BBUE from DCUC to batteries from DCUC to backplane from + busbar to cabinet body (optional)
54 VDC/3 A 54 VDC/3 A 54 VDC/3 A 54 VDC/3 A 54 VDC/6 A Control 54 VDC 54 VDC/max. 125 A 54 VDC/max. 125 A controls/alarms + grounding
4. TECHNICAL DATA
Table 3.
Dimensions and Weight of the DCU

330 mm (13 in) 130 mm (5.1 in) 280 mm (11 in) 5.6 kg (12.3 lb)
4.2. DC Input and Output

Power consumption of the DCU is 15 W. All ACU inputs and outputs are protected with MCB-type fuses. Table 4. DC Input Values
DCUA/D DCUC
Nominal input voltage Maximum input current
48 VDC 100 A
48 VDC 125 A
Table 5.
Output Values (DCUA/D DC)

Battery 48 VDC 100 A LTE 48 VDC 5x3A 1x6A BTS 48 VDC 100 A
Nominal output voltage Output current max.
Table 6.
DC Output Values (DCUC)

Battery LTE 48 VDC 5x3A 1x6A BTS 48 VDC 32 A
Nominal output voltage Output current max.
48 VDC 125 A
GSM 900/GSM 1800 DC Connection Unit DCUB, B6Z 466183AE/3.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main functions, features, functional blocks, and external connections of the DC Connection Unit DCUB. The DCUB is a solid part of the Nokia Extratalk Extension GSM 900/GSM 1800 cabinet and its main function is to distribute DC voltage to the Line Terminal Equipment (LTE).
Figure 1. DCUB Front Panel
The DCUB is used in Nokia Extratalk Extension cabinet to distribute DC voltage to Line Terminal Equipment (LTE). It incorporates fuses and provides protection for the LTE from a cold start power-up condition within the cabinet. The DCUB also supplies DC to the Heat Control Unit HCUA. Figure 2 shows how the DCUB interfaces with units in the cabinet.
Figure 2. Block Diagram of the DCUB The LTE supply is controlled by the HCUA. In a cold start or when the cabinet temperature is above the specified range, four 48 VDC relays controlled by the HCUA switch off the power supply to the LTEs. Once the cabinet temperature has stabilised to a predetermined level, the LTEs are switched back on. The DCUB provides 20 fuse-protected LTE outputs and an output for the HCUA at the rear of the unit.
The front of the DCUB is equipped with the following interfaces: MCB-type fuses for each LTE DC feed (16 pieces 3A DC-rated fuses, 4 pieces 6A DC-rated fuses) Sockets for LTE DC output
The rear of the DCUB has the following interfaces: Socket for DC input Socket for DC output to HCUA Socket for control input from HCUA
Figure 3. DCUB Front and Rear Connectors Table 1.

Socket type Two-pin wall socket Two-pin wall socket Two-pin wall socket Two-pin wall socket Two-pin DC socket
DCUB Connections
Direction LTE feed LTE feed from HCUA to DCUB from DCUB to HCUA power supply to DCUB Line Type 54 VDC/3 A 54 VDC/6 A Control 54 VDC 54 VDC
4. TECHNICAL DATA
4.1. Mechanical Dimensions
Table 2.

652 mm (25.7 in) 83 mm (3.1 in) 200 mm (7.9 in) 5.0 kg (11 lb)
4.2. DC Input and Output

DC Input voltage range is 40 ... 60 VDC. Table 3. DC Output Values
Customer's radio links Output voltage range Output current max. Protection 40 ... 60 VDC 3 A/6 A rated by fuse Fuse
GSM 900 Diversity Antenna Isolation Filter Unit DIFA, B6Z 466763AE/3.0.0
1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the operation and interfaces of the Diversity Antenna Isolation Filter unit (DIFA). The DIFA is an optional unit that can be used in Nokia Intratalk and Citytalk GSM 900 BTSs to improve isolation between the transmitter and diversity receiver antennas. The DIFA unit is a passive plug-in unit that requires no DC power or alarm connections. The unit requires no tuning. The DIFA is shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1. The DIFA
2. CONFIGURATIONS
The DIFA can be used in the Intratalk and Citytalk GSM 900 BTSs when the BTS is equipped with the Antenna Filter Extension unit AFE. A single DIFA can handle all three sectors. The unit is always installed in the BTS Basic cabinet and connected to AFEs 1 to 3 with external cabling. The DIFA cannot be used with the following: Dual duplex The Remote Tune Combiner (RTC) and Receiver Multicoupler (RMU) The Masthead Preamplifier unit (MHP)
The DIFA consists of three separate and identical receiver band filters, each with its own input and output.
Figure 2. DIFA Block Diagram

4. OPERATION
The DIFA is not required when the level of the TX signal is low enough so as not to cause any disturbance to the receiver. However, if the isolation of the BTS antennas is below specification, additional protection of the receivers is required. Configurations where the DIFA is used have two antennas, one of which carries duplexed TX and RX signals. The receiver connected to this antenna is already protected by a duplex filter and does not require further protection. The second antenna is for the diversity receiver and it is this receiver which suffers from the high level of TX signals. The DIFA is added into the RF path between the antenna to the diversity RX input of the BTS AFE unit (as shown Figure 3), providing over 30 dB of additional rejection of the TX signal, while only reducing the RX signal by 0.5 dB at maximum. The unit does not affect the performance of the BTS and, in commissioning, it can be included in the antenna feeder loss calibration.
Figure 3. DIFA Operating Environment The frequency response of the DIFA filters is shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4. Frequency Response of the DIFA Filters
The DIFA has six N-type, 50-ohm, female RF connectors on the front panel. Table 1.
Connector IN 1 OUT 1 IN 2
DIFA Front Panel Connectors

Purpose Filter input, 1st sector Filter output, 1st sector Filter input, 2nd sector
OUT 2 IN 3 OUT 3
Filter output, 2nd sector Filter input, 3rd sector Filter output, 3rd sector
6. TECHNICAL DATA
Table 2.

245 mm (9.8 in) 62 mm (2.5 in) Max. 282 mm (11.3 in) Max. 3 kg (6.6 lb)
Digital Microwave Radio DMR 18-38I, B6Z 054304AE/4.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main functions and features, functional blocks, and external interfaces of the Digital Microwave Radio (DMR) 18-38I. For more detailed information, refer to DMR 18-38 Product Overview and DMR 18-38I Operating Handbook. The digital radio relay equipment DMR 18-38I provides a 2 x 2 or a 4 x 2 Mbit/s data connection between a Base Transceiver Station (BTS) and a Base Station Controller (BSC), or between BTSs. The DMR 18-38I is compatible with the Nokia Intratalk (Indoor) and Nokia Citytalk (Outdoor) cabinets. The DMR 18-38I consists of two units, an indoor unit (RRI; Radio Relay Interface) and an outdoor unit (OU). The two units are presented in Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Figure 1. DMR 18-38I Indoor Unit (RRI)
Figure 2. DMR 18-38I Outdoor Unit (OU)
The Outdoor Unit (OU) is installed into a mast, on a roof or a wall, and the RRI is installed inside the BTS cabinet. A BTS can be equipped with up to two RRIs. The RRI and OU are interconnected with two coaxial cables (IU-OU cables) with maximum length of 300 m. The IU-OU cables carry data, supply voltage, and control and alarm status signals between the RRI and the OU. Figure 3 presents the DMR 18-38I in the BTS.
Figure 3. Block Diagram of DMR 18-38I
2.1. Features
There are three frequency ranges available; 18, 23, and 38 GHz.
DMR 18-38I offers two capacity options: 2 x 2 Mbit/s or 4 x 2 Mbit/s. The equipment can only be used in a non-protected operating mode. Features of the DMR 18-38I include the following: support for Transmission Management System (TMS) available built-in multiplexer and cross-connection for 2 Mbit/s signals (G.703) built-in dynamic repeater bus adjustable output power synthesiser-controlled selection of RF channels reliable and spectrum-efficient CPM modulation selectable scrambling word several loopback facilities for fault localisation
The equipment complies with the following specifications: Statistics of the transmission quality compiled by the equipment are in accordance with the ITU-T recommendations G.821. The statistics can be read from the radio equipment locally or remotely by Service Terminal. Jitter complies with the ITU-T G.823 specification. The AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) complies with the ITU-T G.921 specification. The radiated emission meets the specification C.I.S.P.R. 22 class 2.
2.2. Operation
The DMR 18-38I provides a data connection between the BTS and the BSC, or between BTSs. The unit operates on frequency bands 18, 23, and 38 GHz. The frequencies can be selected in 1.25 MHz steps in 18 GHz radios and in 1.75 MHz steps in 23 GHz and 38 GHz radios within each frequency band. Like other Nokia transmission equipment connected to the network, this equipment can be supervised and controlled either locally using the Service Terminal (ST) or the DMR Manager, or remotely from the Network Management System (NMS). The alarms and their causes are reported to the NMS automatically. Alternatively, a separate Transmission Management System (TMS) can be used and a BTS independent Q1 bus can be built. The frequencies within a sub-band are set using the Service Terminal (ST). No RF channel filter tuning is required. Table 1 shows the frequency bands of the DMR 18-38I, and Table 2 presents the minimum spacing between two adjacent channels. Table 1. Frequency Bands of DMR 18-38I
Equipment DMR 18 DMR 23 DMR 23 DMR 38
Frequency Band (GHz) 17.7 ... 19.7 21.2 ... 23.6 22.0 ... 23.6 37.0 ... 39.5
Duplex Spacing (MHz) 1010 1232 1008 1260
Sub-bands Bands 8 8 4 8
Width (MHz) 250 280 292 280
Table 2.
Equipment DMR 18-38 DMR 18-38
Minimum Spacing between Two Adjacent Channels

Capacity 2 x 2 Mbit/s 4 x 2 Mbit/s Minimum Channel Spacing, dfmin Same Polarisation Cross Polarisation 3.5 MHz 7.0 MHz 0 MHz 0 MHz
2.2.1. Built-in Multiplexer and Cross-Connection System The built-in multiplexer and cross-connection for 2 Mbit/s signals in the DMR 18-38I facilitates branching in chained networks. The branching of the 2 Mbit/s channels at the repeater station can be selected by means of the software; either locally with an ST or remotely with the TMS (Transmission Management System). The dynamic cross-connecting facilitates flexible structural changes in the network as compared to the conventional system in which the equipment often requires the setting of a number of jumpers or cables when hardware is subject to change. 2.2.2. CPM Modulation The DMR 18-38I offers a reliable and spectrum-efficient CPM modulation with a narrow-spectrum mask. The CPM modulation resists interferences efficiently. It also offers efficient use of radio frequencies. 2.2.3. Adjustable Output Power The output power can be mechanically adjusted between 0 ... 30 dB. With the adjustable output power settings, interference of other systems is avoided and the frequencies can therefore be reused efficiently.
3.1. Indoor Unit (RRI)
Figure 4. Functional Blocks of the Indoor Unit (RRI) The RRI operates with the Transmission Unit (TRU). The signals between them pass via cabinet's common backplane. The RRI consists of a multiplexer/demultiplexer (2 x 2 Mbit/s or 4 x 2 Mbit/s) and a controller. The RRI passes the supply voltage to the OU. The power switch of the OU is in the RRI front panel. The main traffic to the RRI is multiplexed and framed into one main signal, which is transmitted through the IU-OU cables to the OU. The frame of the main signal entering the RRI is deframed and demultiplexed. The 2M signals are connected to the common backplane and further to the TRU. The functions of the RRI are controlled and monitored by a microcontroller. The OU supply voltage is transmitted over the centre conductors of the IU-OU cables except for the lowest supply voltage of 24/26 V, when the OU supply voltage is transmitted along separate cables from an external power supply to the AUXBATT connector of the OU.
3.2. Outdoor Unit (OU)

The OU consists of three main blocks: radio section, alignment unit, and antenna. 3.2.1. Radio Section
Figure 5. Functional Blocks of the Radio Section The Microwave Unit (MWU) generates the transmitted signal and intermediate frequency signal of the receiver, separates the transmitter and receiver signals, and generates the auxiliary intermediate frequency. The synthesiser feeds a reference signal to the MWU, on the basis of which the MWU generates the auxiliary intermediate frequency. The synthesiser defines the channel frequencies of the radio together with the intermediate frequency. In the IF Unit (IFU), the transmitter modulation is eliminated from the receiver signal by mixing the receiver intermediate and auxiliary intermediate frequencies together, resulting in second intermediate frequency. The CPM modem controls and modulates the MWU's oscillator. The modem also contains a microprocessor which monitors and controls the operation of the OU, executes control commands sent by the RRI, and transmits status information and alarms between the RRI and the OU. The Cable Interface Unit (CI) is located right beside the interface of the IU-OU cables and it includes the overvoltage protection for the IU-OU cables and components necessary to separate the data and supply voltage from each other. The operating voltages generated by the power supply and certain control/alarm signals to various radio section units are distributed through the CI unit. The power supply generates the operating voltages required by the OU either from the supply voltage fed by the RRI or from the voltage fed by an external voltage supply (AUXBATT).
The auxiliary battery voltage connector (AUXBATT) is a 2-pin DC connector through which the supply voltage can alternatively be fed to the OU. The AGC connector (AGCMON) consists of two connectors located in the connector case. The AGC signal connected to the AGC connector is used for antenna alignment. In the BNC connector (SYNMON) the crystal frequency of the synthesiser local oscillator can be measured. 3.2.2. Alignment Unit and Antenna The integrated antenna is mounted onto the side of the alignment unit connector case. If a separate antenna is used, the antenna is connected to the radio section. The antenna alignment section is attached to the side of the connector case. With the help of the antenna alignment section the whole equipment is attached to the installation tube and the antenna is aligned.
The interfaces are presented in Table 3. The RRI unit's front panel LEDs are presented in Table 4. Table 3.
Interface Main Channels MAINI
External Interfaces
Location Common PCB Type 2/4 x 2 Mbit/s G.703, unbalanced 75 ohm Connection via Common PCB and TRU Interface to RRI P 9600 bit/s V.11 Connection via Common PCB and TRU N SMB Plug connector 80 kohm 0...8 V BNC, female f 360 MHz (3*LO) -10 dBm 2-pole ITT Canon, CAO2 COM-E/6-11 PX8 01 20...72 V Waveguide flange: 18 and 23 GHz: 154 IEC-UBR 220 38 GHz: 154 IEC-UBR 320
Service Interface MI
TRU1 front panel
IU-OU Connectors Measurement Point MP AGC-Voltage Measurement Point (AGCMON) 120 MHz LO Measurement Point (SYNMON)
RRI front panel RRI front panel Outdoor unit (OU)
Outdoor unit (OU)
External power supply voltage (AUX Outdoor unit (OU) BATT) Antenna connector Outdoor unit (OU)
Table 4.
Red
RRI Front Panel LEDs

FLT Failure
Red Yellow Green
FLT ALM OPR
Failure Alarm Normal operation
5. TECHNICAL DATA
5.1. Dimensions and Weights
Table 5. Dimension and Weight of the Outdoor Unit (OU)
Without Antenna and Alignment Unit 425 mm 220 mm 230 mm 9.5 kg With 30 cm Antenna and Alignment Unit 595 mm 460 mm 510 mm 17.5 kg With 60 cm Antenna and Alignment Unit 760 mm 680 mm 750 mm 23 kg
DMR 18-38I Configuration
Table 6.
Dimensions and Weight of the Indoor Unit (RRI)

130 mm 25 mm 280 mm 0.5 kg
5.2. Environmental Conditions

Table 7. Environmental Conditions of the Outdoor Unit (OU)
-30 ... +40 C (-22 ... +104F) allowed at +40C (+104F)
Ambient temperature Sun radiation of 1.12 kW/m2
5.3. Operating Voltages

The BTS feeds the supply voltage (-48 VDC) to the RRI, which then produces and passes the voltage needed by the OU. The power feed to the Outdoor unit (OU) can be implemented in two ways:
In the coaxial cables (IU-OU cables). From an external power supply to AUXBATT connector.
The operating voltage of the DMR 18-38I is between 20 and 72 VDC. The maximum power consumption of the DMR 18-38I is during start-up and at lowest temperatures 76 W; at room temperature under 43 W.

The connections of the IU-OU cables are overvoltage protected (5 kV). In addition, the Cable Interface unit (CI) includes the overvoltage protection of the supply voltage connector (AUXBATT).

The RRI unit is sensitive to electromagnetic charges. The user should take care of proper grounding when handling the unit. The Radio Section of the Outdoor Unit shall not be left outdoors unpowered if there is a possibility of water condensation.
5.6. 18 GHz Radio with 1010 MHz Duplex Spacing

Table 8. Technical Data on the 18 GHz Radio with 1010 MHz Duplex Spacing
5 ppm 1010 MHz CPM (Continuous Phase Modulation) 2 x 2 Mbit/s 4 x 2 Mbit/s > 102 dB > 99 dB > 105 dB > 102 dB 2 x 2 Mbit/s: 0...1.4 MHz 3.5 MHz channel spacing 2.6...2.9 MHz . > 4.5 MHz 4 x 2 Mbit/s: 0...2.8 MHz 7.0 MHz channel spacing 5.0...5.5 MHz > 8.5 MHz > +18 dBm (-2.0 ... +3.0 dB) 0 ... 30 dB . . < 1.5 dB < 1.5 dB 0.07 ... 21.2 GHz 21.2 ... 55.0 GHz < 9 dB
Frequency Stability Duplex Spacing Modulation Method System Value Guaranteed: Typical: Spectrum Mask (Including Drift) and Channel Spacing
< 0 dB < -25 dB < -50 dB < 0 dB < -25 dB < -50 dB
Transmit Power at Antenna Connector in all Conditions (Attenuator = 0 dB) TX Power Attenuator Range Transmit Power Stability (T= +25 C, f = fcenter) Variation over Temperature Variation over Frequency Spurious Emissions (TX and RX) at Antenna Connector Receiver Noise Figure at Antenna Connector (+25 C)
< -60 dB < -30 dB
Max. Input Power Level at Antenna Connector Receiver Thresholds at Antenna Connector BER 10E-3, guaranteed BER 10E-3, typical BER 10E-6, guaranteed BER 10E-6, typical
< -20 dBm 2 x 2 Mbit/s . < -86 dB < -88 dB < -82 dB < -84 dB 4 x 2 Mbit/s . < -83 dB < -85 dB < -79 dB < -81 dB

5 ppm 1232 MHz CPM (Continuous Phase Modulation) 2 x 2 Mbit/s 4 x 2 Mbit/s > 101 dB > 98 dB > 104 dB > 101 dB 2 x 2 Mbit/s: > 8.5 MHz 0...1.4 MHz 3.5 MHz channel spacing 2.6...2.9 MHz . > 4.5 MHz 4 x 2 Mbit/s: 0...2.8 MHz 7.0 MHz channel spacing 5.0...5.5 MHz > +17 dBm (-1.5 ... +3.0 dB) 0 ... 30 dB . . < 1.5 dB < 1.5 dB 0.07 ... 21.2 GHz 21.2 ... 55.0 GHz < 10 dB < -20 dBm 2 x 2 Mbit/s . < -85 dB < -87 dB < -81 dB < -83 dB 4 x 2 Mbit/s . < -82 dB < -84 dB < -78 dB < -80 dB
Frequency Stability Duplex Spacing Modulation Method System Value Guaranteed: Typical: Spectrum Mask (Including Drift) and Channel Spacing prETS 300 198/MPT 1409
< 0 dB < -25 dB < -50 dB < 0 dB < -25 dB < -50 dB
Transmit Power at Antenna Connector in all Conditions (attenuator = 0 dB) TX Power Attenuator Range Transmit Power Stability (T= +25 C, f = fcentre) Variation over Temperature Variation over Frequency Spurious emissions (TX and RX) at Antenna Connector Receiver Noise Figure at Antenna Connector (+25 C) Max. Input Power Level at Antenna Connector Receiver Thresholds at Antenna Connector BER 10E-3, guaranteed BER 10E-3, typical BER 10E-6, guaranteed BER 10E-6, typical
< -60 dB < -30 dB

Frequency Stability Duplex Spacing Modulation Method System Value Guaranteed: 5 ppm 1008 MHz CPM (Continuous Phase Modulation) 2 x 2 Mbit/s 4 x 2 Mbit/s > 101 dB > 98 dB
Typical: Spectrum Mask (incl. drift) and Channel Spacing prETS 300 198/MPT 1409
> 104 dB 2 x 2 Mbit/s: 3.5 MHz channel spacing . 4 x 2 Mbit/s: 7.0 MHz channel spacing > +17 dBm (-1.5 ... +3.0 dB) 0 ... 30 dB . . < 1.5 dB < 1.5 dB 0.07 ... 21.2 GHz 21.2 ... 55.0 GHz < 10 dB < -20 dBm 2 x 2 Mbit/s . < -85 dB < -87 dB < -81 dB < -83 dB
> 101 dB 0...1.4 MHz 2.6...2.9 MHz > 4.5 MHz 0...2.8 MHz 5.0...5.5 MHz > 8.5 MHz
< 0 dB < -25 dB < -50 dB < 0 dB < -25 dB < -50 dB
Transmit Power at Antenna Connector in all Conditions (attenuator = 0 dB) TX Power Attenuator Range Transmit Power Stability (T= +25 C, f = fcenter) Variation over Temperature Variation over Frequency Spurious Emissions (TX and RX) at antenna connector Receiver Noise Figure at Antenna Connector (+25 C) Max. Input Power Level at Antenna Connector Receiver Thresholds at Antenna Connector BER 10E-3, guaranteed BER 10E-3, typical BER 10E-6, guaranteed BER 10E-6, typical
< -60 dB < -30 dB
4 x 2 Mbit/s . < -82 dB < -84 dB < -78 dB < -80 dB

Table 11. Technical Data on the 38 GHz Radio with 1260 MHz Spacing
Frequency Stability Duplex Spacing Modulation Method System Value Guaranteed: Typical: Spectrum Mask (incl. drift) and Channel Spacing prETS 300 197/MPT 1414 5 ppm 1260 MHz CPM (Continuous Phase Modulation) 2 x 2 Mbit/s 4 x 2 Mbit/s > 98 dB > 95 dB > 100 dB > 97 dB 2 x 2 Mbit/s: 0...1.4 MHz 3.5 MHz channel spacing 4 x 2 2.6...2.9 MHz . > 4.5 MHz Mbit/s: 0...2.8 MHz 7.0 MHz channel spacing 5.0...5.5 MHz > 8.5 MHz > +16 dBm (-1.5 ... +3.0 dB) 0 ... 30 dB . . < 1.5 dB < 1.5 dB 0.07 ... 21.2 GHz 21.2 ... 80.0 GHz < 12.5 dB < -20 dBm
< 0 dB < -25 dB < -50 dB < 0 dB < -25 dB < -50 dB
Transmit Power at Antenna Connector in all Conditions (attenuator = 0 dB) TX Power Attenuator Range Transmit Power Stability (T= +25 C, f = fcenter) Variation over Temperature Variation over Frequency Spurious emissions (TX and RX) at antenna connector Receiver Noise Figure at Antenna Connector (+25 C) Max. Input Power Level at Antenna
< -60 dB < -30 dB
Connector Receiver Thresholds at Antenna Connector BER 10E-3, guaranteed BER 10E-3, typical BER 10E-6, guaranteed BER 10E-6, typical
2 x 2 Mbit/s . < -83 dB < -84 dB < -79 dB < -80 dB
4 x 2 Mbit/s . < -80 dB < -81 dB < -76 dB < -77 dB
Floating Transceiver Switch FTS for GSM 900/GSM 1800 BTS, B6Z 465291AE/2.0.0
1. INTRODUCTION
The Floating Transceiver Switch unit (FTS) is used in the 1+1 TRX and 1+1+1 TRX BTS configurations to connect the floating (redundant) Transceiver (TRX) to the selected sector to replace a malfunctioning TRX. The FTSA is for GSM 900 and the FTSB for GSM 1800 applications. This document describes the main functions, functional blocks, and external interfaces of the FTS.
Figure 1. The FTS Mechanics Outline
Electrically the FTS comprises two main blocks: receiver (RX) branch (including the diversity branch) and transmitter (TX) branch. Figure 2 shows the main blocks of the FTS.
Figure 2. Main Blocks of the FTS The TX branch contains an RF switch which is a coaxial RF relay. Controlled by the BCF unit, this relay connects the floating TX to the selected sector. The input of the relay is connected to the floating TX's output and the relay's three outputs are connected to the three sectors.
Figure 3. Functional Blocks of TX Branch In both RX branches, a semiconductor RF switch connects the RX signals from the selected sector to the floating RX. One-stage RF transistor amplifiers compensate for the attenuation caused by the RF switch and the cables. The collector currents of the amplifiers are monitored by comparators which provide an alarm to the BCF unit in the event of a failure.
Figure 4. Functional Blocks of RX Branch
There are 12 RF connectors on the FTS front panel. Power supply, control, and alarm interfaces are located on the rear panel of the FTS. The rear connector is a 96-pin Euroconnector. Table 1.
Connector TX IN TX OUT 1 TX OUT 2 TX OUT 3 RX DIV OUT RX DIV IN 1 RX DIV IN 2 RX DIV IN 3 RX MAIN OUT RX MAIN IN 1 RX MAIN IN 2 RX MAIN IN 3 Rear connector
FTS Connectors
Type N N N N SMA SMA SMA SMA SMA SMA SMA SMA Euroconnector Purpose Floating transmitter input Floating transmitter output to sector 1 Floating transmitter output to sector 2 Floating transmitter output to sector 3 Diversity RX signal to the floating RX Diversity RX signal from the sector 1 Diversity RX signal from the sector 2 Diversity RX signal from the sector 3 RX signal to the floating RX RX signal from the sector 1 RX signal from the sector 2 RX signal from the sector 3 Rear side connections for the power supply, alarms, and controls
There are three indicator LEDs on the front panel: FLT, ALM, and OPR. Three further LEDs, SECTOR1, SECTOR 2, and SECTOR 3 show which sector the floating TRX is connected to. When the TRX is not connected, all sector LEDs are off.
4. TECHNICAL DATA
4.1. Power Supply
Table 2.
Supply Voltages
Power Supply
Current Consumption
50 mA 750 mA
4.2. Frequency Ranges

Table 3.
TX/RX TX frequency range [MHz] RX frequency range [MHz]
RX and TX Frequency Ranges

FTSA 925 - 960 880 - 915 FTSB 1805 - 1880 1710 - 1785

Table 4.

262 mm (10.5 in) 96 mm (3.8 in) 287.5 mm (11.5 in) 3.4 kg (7.5 lb)

The alarms and control lines are protected against 30 VDC continuous overvoltage.
Heat Control Unit HCU, B6Z 465561AE/3.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
The Heat Control Unit (HCU) is a plug-in unit that controls the operation of the heat management systems in Nokia Citytalk and Nokia Extratalk cabinets. It can identify the cabinet type it is located in and operate accordingly. When necessary, the HCU sends temperature-related and smoke alarms to the BCF unit. The HCUA is DC powered and the HCUB is AC powered. This document describes the main functions and features, functional blocks, and interfaces of the HCU.
Figure 1. HCUA and HCUB
2.1. Operation
During normal operation, the air temperature inside the cabinet should be within -10C ... +60C (+14 F...+140F). The specified range varies depending on the cabinet type. The cabinets are equipped with different kinds of heaters and fans or heaters and Air Conditioner (AIC) to ensure that the temperature stays within the specified range. In cabinets equipped with the Heat Exchanger, the HCU controls the operation of the fans and heaters based on the information received from sensors located at different parts of the cabinet, and sends alarms to the Base Control Function unit (BCF) when necessary. Figure 2 shows the HCU's functions with the Heat Exchanger. Dotted lines indicate connections that depend on the cabinet type and configuration.
Figure 2. HCU Alarms, Controls, and Sensor Interfaces with Heat Exchanger In cabinets equipped with the Air Conditioner (AIC), the HCU controls the operation of the heaters and feeds DC power to the AIC. Based on the information received from sensors the HCU can force the AIC to operate with full capacity if the temperature inside the cabinet exceeds the specified limits. Figure 3 shows the HCU's functions with the Air Conditioner. Dotted lines indicate connections that depend on the cabinet type and configuration.
Figure 3. HCU Alarms, Controls, and Sensor Interfaces with Air Conditioner 2.1.1. Control Functions HCU's control functions with the Heat Exchanger are: to switch the cabinet heater(s) on and off
to control the Heat Exchanger's internal and external fans to switch the Cabinet Cooling Fan (CCF) on and off to switch the battery compartment fan on and off to switch the power supplies on and off in a cold start to connect and disconnect power to the Line Terminal Equipment (LTE) in a cold start or when the temperature inside the cabinet rises above the specified range in addition, the HCUB to switch the Battery Backup Unit (BBUE) on and off in a cold start
HCU's control functions with the Air Conditioner are: to switch the cabinet heater(s) on and off to switch the Cabinet Cooling Fan (CCF) on and off to switch the power supplies on and off in a cold start to connect and disconnect power to the Line Terminal Equipment (LTE) in a cold start or when the temperature inside the cabinet rises above the specified range to switch the Air Conditioner (DC supply) on and off to force the Air Conditioner to operate with full capacity when the temperature inside the cabinet exceeds the specified limits in addition, the HCUB to switch the Battery Backup Unit (BBUE) on and off in a cold start
2.1.2. Fan Control With the Heat Exchanger, the HCU controls the different fans independently. The task of the fans is twofold; to cool the cabinet when the temperature inside rises too high and to circulate the air inside the cabinet if the temperature range in different locations of the cabinet is too wide. The Heat Exchanger fan controls differ from the Cabinet Cooling Fan (CCF) and battery compartment fan commands. The Heat Exchanger fans are controlled stepwise (OFF, half speed, or full speed) while the other fan commands are of the ON/OFF type. 2.1.3. Heater Control The heaters are controlled separately. When the temperature inside the cabinet falls below the specified limit, the HCU switches the appropriate heaters on. The heaters remain on until the temperature inside the cabinet reaches the specified limit (including temperature hysteresis). 2.1.4. PSU, BBUE, and LTE Control If the temperature inside the cabinet exceeds or falls below the normal operating temperature of the plug-in units or the LTE, the HCU switches the power supplies (PSU) and LTE on and off as required.
In the Nokia Extratalk AC/AC cabinet, the HCUB has the same control function over the Battery Backup unit (BBUE). 2.1.5. Alarms In case of a malfunction or when the conditions inside the cabinet deviate from the normal operational conditions, the HCU sends an alarm signal to the BCF or the Alarm Connection Unit (APU). The alarms are: temperature alarm, when the temperature inside the cabinet is not within the normal operational range smoke alarm, when the smoke sensor detects smoke inside the cabinet HCU alarm for a blown fuse HCU alarm for a broken or loose sensor HCU alarm for a failure in the command circuit or logic circuit of the unit HCU alarm for a defective fan (with Heat Exchanger) HCU alarm for a defective AIC (with Air Conditioner)
2.1.6. Sensors The cabinets are equipped with the following sensors informing the HCU unit of the conditions inside the cabinet: two or three temperature sensors to monitor the temperature in different parts of the cabinet smoke sensor to detect smoke inside the cabinet with the Heat Exchanger, fan rotation sensors in the Heat Exchanger fans and battery compartment fan to monitor the rotation of fans
2.1.7. Radio Relay Equipment The HCUB supplies the 48 VDC operating voltage (maximum 226 W) for the Integrated (Digital Microwave Radio DMR 18-38I) and/or External (Digital Microwave Radio DMR 18-38S) Radio Relay Equipment. 2.1.8. Test Button Functions The HCU front panel is equipped with a test button, with the following functions: With Heat Exchanger: The test button resets the smoke alarm and allows to test the operation of the Heat Exchanger fans and the battery compartment fan without disturbing the operation of the BTS. One press of the button
resets the smoke alarm and tests the operation of the fans simultaneously. The fan test cannot be carried out, however, if the temperature inside the cabinet is 0C (+32F) or colder because the fan rotation prevention is on in this temperature range. With Air Conditioner: The test button resets the smoke alarm and allows to test the operation of the AIC without disturbing the operation of the BTS. One press of the button resets the smoke alarm and tests the operation of the AIC simultaneously. The AIC test cannot be carried out, however, if the temperature inside the cabinet is 0C (+32F) or colder.
2.2. Main Blocks

The HCU unit consists of three main functional blocks: the power supply block, the fan/AIC switch block, and the microprocessor block.
Figure 4. HCU Block Diagram 2.2.1. Power Supply Block The HCUA power supply block is a switched-mode regulated power supply. The block first filters the DC input voltage to suppress the input noise and limits the inrush current when the unit is switched on. Two regulated power supply voltages are generated for the fan switch block. Over and undervoltage protection is provided with a fuse. The HCUB power supply block is a switched-mode regulated power supply. The block filters the AC input voltage to suppress the input noise, and limits the in-rush current when the unit is switched on. The input voltage is then fed through two circuits. The first is a power factor correction circuit which also rectifies the input voltage. The second circuit is a DC/DC converter regulating the 41 VDC and 48 VDC for the fan switch block. The power supply block also provides overvoltage protection and a
fuse. 2.2.2. Fan/AIC Switch Block The fan/AIC switch block consists of the fan/AIC switches controlled by the microprocessor. At the microprocessor's command the switches supply the fans with either 0V, 41V, or 48V voltage and the fans halt, rotate with half speed, or full speed accordingly, or AIC with either 0V or 48V and the AIC is off and on accordingly. 2.2.3. Microprocessor Block The microprocessor performs the control and alarm operations of the HCU. It also processes the information and controls received from the sensors, the BCF, and the test button.
The HCU front panel is equipped with the following interfaces: three LEDs ON/OFF switch test button fuse socket (T 12.5 A in HCUA, T 4 A in HCUB) two D-connectors AC socket (HCUB)
There are two Euroconnectors at the rear of the HCU.

Table 1 details the front panel LEDs. Table 1.
HCU Front Panel LEDs

3.2. HCUA Front Panel Connectors

Figure 5 shows the pin configurations of HCUA's front connectors.
Figure 5. HCUA Front Panel Pin Configuration
3.3. HCUB Front Panel Connectors

Figure 6 shows the pin configurations of HCUB's front connectors.
Figure 6. HCUB Front Panel Pin Configuration
3.4. Rear Connectors

The rear connectors of the HCU provide interface connections for the control signals from the sensors and BCF to the HCU, the control signals from the HCU to the various units, and for the alarms from the HCU to the BCF or the APU. Figure 7 shows the pins of the rear connectors.
Figure 7. HCU Rear Connector Pins
4. TECHNICAL DATA
Table 2. Input Voltage and Current
HCUA Nominal Voltage Maximum Current 48 to 60 VDC 10 A DC HCUB 208 to 240 VAC 3 A AC
Table 3.
Output Voltage and Current

HCUA HCUB 41 VDC and 48 VDC (with AIC only 48 VDC) 10.7 A DC
Nominal Voltage Maximum Current
41 VDC and 48 VDC (with AIC only 48 VDC) 6.5 A DC
Current Limit
> 7 A DC
> 12 A DC
Efficiency: HCUA > 0.85 (Pout = 250 W); HCUB > 0.85 (Pout = 500 W)

Table 4. Dimensions and Weight
HCUA Width Height Depth Weight 65 mm 2.6 in 262 mm 10.3 in 334 mm 13.1 in 3.2 kg (7 lb) HCUB 65 mm (2.6 in) 262 mm (10.3 in) 334 mm (13.1 in) 3.7 kg (8.2 lb)

The HCU overvoltage protection in the input line is provided with a voltage dependent resistor. The HCUA includes a T 12.5 A fuse and the HCUB includes a T 4 A fuse.
4.4. Handling and Storage

Storage temperature is -45C.....+80C (-49F...+177F) and operating temperature is -33C.....+60C (-27F...+140F).
Heater Kit HRU, B6Z 465943AE/4.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
There are four types of Heater Kits (HRU) available. HRUB (GSM 900/1800) and HRUD (GSM 1900) can be used to heat the Nokia Citytalk BTS cabinet and Nokia Extratalk Extension cabinet. HRUC (GSM 900/1800) and HRUE (GSM 1900) can be used to heat the Nokia Extratalk cabinet. The units keep the temperature inside the cabinet within the specified operating range. This document describes the function, main functional blocks and the interfaces of the HRU. Figure 1 and Figure 3 show the parts of the heater kits.
Figure 1. HRUB/D; the Relay Module and the Heater
Figure 2. HRUC/E; the Relay Module, the Main Equipment Compartment Heater, and the Battery Compartment Heater (Rubber Mat)
2.1. HRUB/D
2.1.1. Features The HRUB/D is pre-installed into the Nokia Citytalk BTS and Nokia Extratalk Extension cabinets. The heater in the HRUB/D is powerful enough to raise the temperature inside the cabinet to the normal operating level in five hours when the ambient temperature is -33 C (-27.4F). 2.1.2. Operation The HRUB/D is controlled by the Heat Control Unit HCU. The heating command is of on/off type. During normal BTS operation, the temperature inside the cabinet should be from -10C to +60C (+14F to 140F). The heating commands are set so that under normal conditions the temperature stays well within these limits. When the temperature in the cabinet falls below a set limit, the HCU switches the heater on, and when the temperature is safely within the normal operating range, the HCU switches the heater off again. 2.1.2.1. Cold Start Situation A cold start situation occurs if the temperature inside the cabinet during the BTS power-up is, or has during a mains breakdown fallen, below -10 C (+14F). In that case, the HRUB/D operates normally, but power input to the Power Supply Units (PSUs) is disconnected in order to protect the plug-in units. The HCU will not connect power to the PSUs and shift the BTS into normal operation -mode until the temperature is safely within the normal operating range again. 2.1.3. Blocks The HRUB/D consists of a heater, a relay module, a control cable, and of some nuts and washers for fixation. The functional blocks of the HRUB/D can be seen in Figure 3.
Figure 3. HRUB/D Block Diagram The heater is a fan heater operating with 208 - 240 VAC. The operating power for the heater comes from the AC mains through the relay module. The heater is fixed on the cabinet floor. The Heat Control Unit HCU controls the heater via the relay module. The relay module includes a relay and a control for the heater. With these the HCU unit can switch the heater on and off. The relay module is fixed on the back left-hand corner of the cabinet floor. There are two temperature sensors for the heater inside the cabinet; Sensor 1 in the top part and Sensor 2 in the bottom part of the cabinet. 2.1.4. Overvoltage Protection The HRUB/D is protected against overcurrent with a T 8 A fuse in the 3-pole-M plug reserved for the AC mains power input.
2.2. HRUC/E
2.2.1. Features The HRUC/E is pre-installed into the Nokia Extratalk cabinet. The heaters in the HRUC/E are powerful enough to raise the temperature in the Nokia Extratalk cabinet to the normal operating level in five hours when the ambient temperature is -33 C (-27.4F). 2.2.2. Operation The HRUC/E is controlled by the Heat Control Unit HCU. The HRUC/E includes two separately operating heaters; one for each compartment of the Nokia Extratalk cabinet. The HCU can operate the heaters independently via a relay module. The heating command is of on/off type. During normal BTS operation, the temperature inside the Nokia Extratalk cabinet should stay within 0C to +50C (+32F to 122F). The heating commands are set so that under normal conditions the temperature stays well within these limits. When the temperature in either of the cabinet compartments falls below a set limit, the HCU switches the appropriate heater(s) on. And when the temperature is safely within normal operational range, the HCU will switch the heater(s) off. 2.2.2.1. Cold Start Situation A cold start situation occurs if the temperature inside the cabinet during the BTS power-up is, or has during a mains breakdown fallen, below -10 C (+14F). In that case, the HRUC/E operates normally, but power input to the Line Terminal Equipment (LTE) is disconnected in order to protect it. The HCU will not connect power to the LTE and shift the BTS into normal operation -mode until the temperature is safely within the normal operating range again. 2.2.3. Blocks The HRUC/E system consists of two heaters (the main equipment compartment heater and the battery compartment heater), a relay module, control cables, an AC-input cable (an intermediate cable between the plug-in and the relay module) and of some nuts and washers for fixation. The functional blocks of the HRUC/E can be seen in Figure 4.
Figure 4. HRUC/E Block Diagram 2.2.3.1. Main Equipment Compartment Heater The main equipment compartment heater is a fan heater operating with 208 - 240 VAC. The operating power for the heater comes from the AC mains through the relay module. The heater is located at the bottom of the main equipment compartment. 2.2.3.2. Battery Compartment Heater The battery compartment heater is a silicone rubber mat heater operating with 208 - 240 VAC. The operating power for the heater comes from the AC mains through the relay module. The mat heater is attached underneath the plate under the batteries in the battery compartment. 2.2.3.3. Relay Module The Heat Control Unit HCU controls the two heaters individually via the relay module. The relay
module includes separate relays and controls for both heaters. With these the HCU can switch the heaters on and off independently, depending on the situation. The relay module is fixed in the top rear corner of the right hand wall of the cabinet. 2.2.3.4. Sensors There are temperature sensors for both heaters inside the cabinet; two for the main heater in the main equipment compartment (Sensor1 in the top and Sensor 2 in the bottom part of the compartment) and one for the battery compartment heater in the battery compartment (Sensor 3). 2.2.4. Overvoltage Protection The HRUC/E is protected against overcurrent with a T 8 A fuse in the 3-pole-M plug reserved for the AC mains power input. The mat heater includes a T 1.0 A fuse of its own.
Figure 5. Front Panel of the Relay Module in the HRU The front panel of the relay module (Figure 5) is equipped with: two 2-pole DC-connectors with clamps (CONTROL1 and CONTROL2) two 3-pole AC-sockets (250V, 10A) with a stopper (OUT1 and OUT2) 3-pole-M plug with an 8A fuse and a cord retaining clamp (IN)
In the HRUB/D combination only CONTROL1, OUT1, and IN are in use. The purposes of the
different connectors are given in Table 1. Table 1.

Connector CONTROL1 OUT1 IN
Front Panel Connectors of the Relay Module in the HRUB

From To HCU (via the backplane) Relay module Relay module Heater ACUA/D/C HRUB/D (Relay module) Purpose Heater control signal input AC mains outlet for the heater AC mains power input
Table 2.
Connector CONTROL1
Front Panel Connectors of the Relay Module in the HRUC

From To HCU (via the backplane) Relay module Purpose Main equipment compartment heater control signal input Battery compartment heater control signal input AC mains outlet for the main equipment compartment heater AC mains outlet for the battery compartment heater AC mains power input
CONTROL2
HCU (via the backplane) Relay module
OUT1
Relay module Main equipment compartment heater
OUT2
Relay module Battery compartment heater
IN
ACUA/D/C HRUC/E (Relay module)
4. TECHNICAL DATA
Table 3. Technical Data on the HRU Heater
HRUB/D Input voltage Power Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) Weight Minimum Temperature of Operation 208 - 240 VAC 1100 W 5% (230 VAC) 91 x 330 x 358 mm (3.6 x 13 x 14.1 in) 3.2 kg (7.1 lb) -33 C (-27.4F) HRUC/E 208 - 240 VAC 800 W 5% (230 VAC) 86 x 182 x 210 mm (3.4 x 7.2 x 8.3 in) 1.2 kg (2.6. lb) -33 C (-27.4F)
Table 4.
AC Input
Technical Data on the HRU Relay Module

208 - 240 VAC 208 - 240 VAC 48 VDC T8A
AC Output (for the heater) DC Input (control signal) Fuse
67 x 123 x 120 mm (2.6 x 4.8 x 4.7 lb) 0.8 kg (1.8 lb)
Table 5.
Input Voltage Power Fuse
Technical Data on the HRUC/E Battery Compartment Heater

208 - 240 V AC 130 W 5% (230 VAC) T 1.0 A 280 x 490 mm 0.3 kg -33 C
Dimensions (Width x Depth) Weight Minimum Temperature of Operation
Junction Box JUBA, B6Z 061516AE/2.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
The JUBA is a junction box that distributes AC power from Extratalk AC/AC system to the BTS. This document describes the main features, functions and interfaces of JUBA. Figure 1 presents JUBA.
Figure 1. JUBA
2.1. Features
JUBA can be used both indoors and outdoors. The unit can be attached to a wall and it is meant for
fixed installation. JUBA can be used to distribute AC power from Extratalk AC/AC system to the BTSs when the distance between them is long and the cable cross-section is large provide the BTS with a protector against overvoltages improve personal safety with residual current device (RDC) provide the BTS with an isolation switch for switching off the mains power chain the AC power.
JUBA has a residual current device (RCD) and overvoltage protectors. Figure 2 presents the layout of JUBA.
Figure 2. JUBA Layout
2.2. Operation
As shown in Figure 3, the junction box is an enclosure containing a switch for one output and terminal blocks for distributing supply to two outputs. JUBA also contains one input for AC supply.
Figure 3. Distribution Block Diagram The AC supply cable comes into the unit through a cable entry. One AC supply goes to the BTS through the switch and RCD. The other AC supply is distributed by the terminal blocks to the BTSs.
3.1. AC input interfaces
JUBA contains an interface for one input cable. This is handled by terminal blocks. These terminal blocks form two sets in each of which three terminal blocks are connected together by rail. The first terminal block is for a "live" wire (L) and the second one for a "neutral" wire (N). There is a separate rail for "protective earth" (PE). Figure 4 presents the interfaces of JUBA.
Figure 4. Interfaces of JUBA
3.2. AC output interfaces

JUBA contains interfaces for two (2) output cables with three copper wires (max. 35 mm2/wire).
4. ACCESSORIES
4.1. Residual Current Device
Residual current device (RCD) is an equipment, which provides protection against electric shocks.
4.2. Overvoltage Protector

Overvoltage protector is an equipment, which provides protection against overvoltages, for example lightning. Figure 5 presents the circuit diagram for JUBA.
Figure 5. Circuit Diagram
5. TECHNICAL DATA
Table 1.
Height (max.) Width (max.) Depth (max.) Weight (max.)

300 mm (11,81 in) 300 mm (11,81 in) 150 mm (5,91 in) 7 kg (15,4 lb)
Masthead Preamplifier MHP, B6Z 465335AE/8.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the features, functions, and interfaces of the Masthead Preamplifier (MHP) unit. The MHP filters and amplifies receiver band signals in the GSM system. The gain of the MHP can be adjusted to compensate for the loss in the antenna feeder cable. The MHP is used to improve the signal-to-noise ratio, which results in better receiving sensitivity. In practice, this means an increase in cell radius, particularly in areas where sufficient signal strength is difficult to achieve in the uplink direction from the Mobile Stations (MS) to the Base Transceiver Station (BTS). The MHP changes the balancing of the uplink/downlink transmission so that the transmitter power of the MS can be decreased. Thus the call time can be increased. The unit is installed up in the mast close to the receiver (RX) antenna.
Figure 1. The MHP (Rings Around the Connectors Only in the MHPB)
2.1. Features
Adjustable Gain The gain of the MHPA/MHPD unit is adjustable to correspond to the loss in the antenna feeder cable between the BTS and the RX antenna. The unit can be adjusted by the operator in 1 dB steps to compensate for a cable loss of 4 to 9 dB. The gain of the MHPB is set at the factory to 7 dB 1 dB. Allows RX Antenna Monitoring The bypassing of the MHP RX filter and amplifier allows the BTS to monitor the RX antenna. The bypassing is controlled by the BTS during the monitoring. When the RX antenna is monitored manually with a separate measuring device from the BTS end of the antenna feeder cable, no supply voltage is needed by the MHP to allow the antenna monitoring. Fail-Safe Operation In case of an amplifier failure, the RX filter and the amplifier module are bypassed automatically to allow the operation of the receiver chain to continue with only slightly reduced receiving sensitivity. In the BTS, the RX multicoupler monitors the operation of the MHP and generates an alarm if the preset alarm limits are exceeded. Compact in Size and Easy to Mount into the Mast The unit weighs less than 5 kg and the volume of the box is only 3.6 dm3. With the optional mounting hardware, the unit can be mounted easily, for example, onto mast tubes of 30 to 160 mm in diameter. MHP in Antenna Diversity Systems When the BTS has two receiving antennas, both antennas can be equipped with an individual MHP. If a duplex filter is used in one antenna, all other antennas can be equipped with MHPs. Supply Voltage Feed
The supply voltage to the MHP is fed through the centre conductor of the RX antenna feeder cable by the BTS. No additional DC voltage feeding devices are necessary. Weather Protectors in the MHPB The MHPB unit has rings around the input and output connectors to facilitate the use of weather protectors over the cable connectors. The rings are made to match protectors of type 021.097 made by Kathrein. They are not supplied by Nokia.
2.2. Restrictions
2.2.1. General Restrictions The MHP is designed to be used only in the receiving branch of the BTS. Caution: The MHP must never be installed in antennas which are used both for transmitting and receiving by means of a Duplex Filter. 2.2.2. Restrictions Concerning the DE 21 Product Family When the MHP is used with the DE 21 BTS, the following restrictions apply: The BTS must be equipped with the RMCx12 or a later version of the multicoupler with a built-in support for the MHP. This support includes supply voltage feeding and the supervision of the MHP operation. The BTS software version must be 7.0 or later. If the total number of RMCx12s and MHPs is greater than six, the Station Unit power supply should be version SUPx23 or a later version.
2.3. Main Blocks

The MHP comprises two modules: the RX filter and the amplifier.
Figure 2. Main Blocks of the MHP 2.3.1. RX Filter The RX filter filters out the unwanted signals. The filter consists of a passive low-pass section and a passive bandpass section based on coaxial resonators. The passband of the filter in MHPA/B is 880 915 MHz and in MHPD 898 - 911 MHz.
Figure 3. RX Filter Block 2.3.2. Amplifier Module
The amplifier module amplifies the incoming signals in the receiving band. The bias voltages of the amplifiers are supervised and in the case of a failure both the amplifiers and the RX filter are bypassed.
Figure 4. Functional Blocks of the Amplifier Module The RF relays are used to bypass the RX filter and the amplifier circuitry in case of an amplifier failure or if the supply voltage to the Masthead Preamplifier is missing or switched off. The bypassing of the RX filter and the amplifier allows the BTS to monitor the RX antenna. The amplifier is a two-branch low noise amplifier. The branches are connected in parallel to meet the requirements of linearity and high reliability. The gain of the MHPA/MHPD unit can be adjusted in 1 dB steps in the range of 4 to 9 dB. The adjustable attenuation consists of a PIN diode attenuator and the biasing circuitry. The gain is adjusted with a rotary switch. The gain of the MHPB unit is fixed to 7 dB 1 dB. The operation monitoring and fault indication circuitry supervises the operation of the amplifiers and generates a fault indication when the preset alarm limits have been exceeded. The monitoring circuitry also controls the operation of the relays.
3. TECHNICAL DATA
3.1. Connectors
The RF input (ANT IN) and RF output (BTS OUT) connectors are 7/16 female connectors, both at
the bottom of the unit. The grounding point is an M8 screw with a nut.
3.2. Mechanical Dimensions

Table 1.

250 mm (10 in) 120 mm (4.8 in) 120 mm (4.8 in) < 5 kg (11 lb)
3.3. RF Characteristics
Table 2. RF Characteristics
MHPA Frequency range Gain Noise Figure VSWR, in/out 880 - 915 MHz 4 to 9 dB, 1 dB steps <3.6 dB, Gmax <4.1 dB, Gmin <1.6:1 MHPB 880 - 915 MHz 7 dB 1 dB <3.7 dB <1.6:1 MHPD 898 - 911 MHz 4 to 9 dB, 1 dB steps <3.6 dB, Gmax <4.1 dB, Gmin <1.6:1
3.4. Supply Voltage

Table 3. Supply Voltage
MHPA/MHPD Supply voltage Supply current (mA) in normal operation in bypass 11.5 V 0.5 V . 90 55 MHPB 11.5 V 0.5 V . 75 45

Both RF input and RF output have surge arresters to protect the unit against overvoltages coming from the RX antenna and the RX antenna feeder cable between the MHP and the BTS. In addition, there is a secondary overvoltage protection in the output of the unit. Good grounding of the unit is essential for overvoltage protection. The unit must always be properly grounded by connecting a grounding cable from the grounding screw in the unit to a good grounding point in the mounting base.
3.6. Environmental Class

The MHP is designed to tolerate and it has been tested in environmental conditions defined in standard ETS 300 019-1-4 class 4.1E. The nearest equivalent IEC 721-3-4 classes are: K2/4Z1/4Z5/4B1/4C2/4S2/4M5. The operation temperature range of MHPA/B is -40 to +45 C and of MHPD -30 to +60 C.
Heat Exchanger MOEA/MOEB, H6Z 465670AE/3.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main features, functions and the external interfaces of the Heat Exchanger used in the Nokia Flexitalk BTS Cabinet. This document covers both the AC and DC applications. The Heat Exchanger is used to maintain the operational temperature within its specified limits inside the outdoor Flexitalk BTS cabinet. Alarm signals will be sent to the BTS if a fault condition is detected.
Figure 1. Mechanical Outline
2.1. Features
The Heat Exchanger is designed to function correctly within the ambient air temperature range of -33 C to +40 C. The Heat Exchanger supports the following features: Maintains the internal BTS air temperature during normal operation within the range of -10 C to +60 C. Controls the start-up of the BTS in extreme cold weather conditions with ambient air temperatures of less than -10 C Permits the BTS to override the local temperature control and switch the heat exchanger fans to full speed, if necessary. An alarm logic to supervise the operating conditions and sends alarm signals to the BTS warning of low or high temperatures and of failure conditions. A test button to check the control logic and the fans without disturbing the normal BTS operation. LED display to indicate either normal or fault conditions. Monitors the door alarm on the outdoor mounting configurations (wall bracket or plinth). Protects itself and neighbouring equipment with correctly rated fuses. Complies with all appropriate national and international regulations for unit safety and EMC regulations.
2.2. Operation
The Heat Exchanger unit consists of: Control board. Heater. Recuperator. Two fans, one fan is used to circulate internal air and the other, external air. Temperature sensor
The mechanics.
The Heat Exchanger monitors the temperature of the air flow within the BTS cabinet to ensure the internal air remains within the operating range. The heater is used to regulate the air temperature within the BTS at low ambient temperatures. The internal fan circulates the air within the BTS cabinet and Heat Exchanger. The external fan draws external air in, as the temperature demands, through the recuperator to aid the Heat Exchanger function. The operation of the Heat Exchanger control logic and fans can be checked by pressing the test button for approximately 15 seconds.
Figure 2. Block Diagram
3.1. Control Board
This module controls the various operational actions of the Heat Exchanger: Monitors and controls the fans and heaters. Provides all electrical connections. Cold start condition. Override facility. Alarms/Status LEDs.
The control board monitors the status of the BTS to Heat Exchanger control line (HCUA_CNTRL) and will react to the demands of the temperature condition. This includes: Controlling the BTS PSU ON/OFF Remote Control lines within 1 second of power switch-ON. Keeping the BTS PSU switched OFF. Switching the heat exchanger heater ON. Switching the heat exchanger internal fan ON. Switching the Low Temperature Alarm signal to the BTS ON.
The control board switches on the appropriate equipment dependent upon the actual temperature of the BTS cabinet air flow. This is illustrated by Figure 3. The speed control circuitry uses a Pulse Width Modulated method to control both the internal and external fans. During periods of extreme cold weather conditions when the ambient air temperature is less than -10 C, the control board controls the BTS system to prevent the effects of thermal shock. The control board warns the BTS system of adverse conditions with the following signals: Temperature High (HCUA_THI) Temperature Low (HCUA_TLO) General Fault (HCUA_FAULT)
Figure 3. Heat Exchanger System
3.2. Heater
The bar element heater is used to regulate the temperature within the BTS cabinet at low ambient temperature. The heater is driven from an AC supply for the AC Heat Exchanger, and AC for the DC Heat Exchanger.
Note: Earlier versions of the DC Heat Exchanger had a heater element driven by the DC supply.
3.3. Fans
There are two fans mounted inside the Heat Exchanger. One is used to circulate internal airflow and the second is used to circulate external airflow. The Heat Exchanger fans are controlled by the control board and both fans are able to run at 100 % or 50 % of full speed. Each fan is activated to ensure the fan operates at the correct speed for the cooling required. The internal fan is a centrifugal blower with a double inlet. It circulates the air within the BTS cabinet and Heat Exchanger. Air is passed up through the recuperator, into the BTS cabinet and vertically through the plug in units. The air is channelled to the front of the BTS cabinet and forced down between the front panels of the plug-in units and the cabinet door. The air is returned to the Heat Exchanger for recirculating. The external fan is a centrifugal fan, backward curved with a single outlet. It draws external air in through the recuperator from the left hand side of the Heat Exchanger through to the right hand side. The air is expelled through the BTS cabinet's rear exit. This action is dictated by the temperature requirements monitored by the control board. The paths of the air being circulated by the two fans are kept separate, as shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4. Air Flow Circulation
3.4. Recuperator
The recuperator unit is central to the function of the Heat Exchanger and is able to transfer heat from the internal air circuit to the external circuit as the temperature demands. The internal air flow is forced vertically by the internal fan through the recuperator and circulated through the BTS plug-in units. This air flow is recirculated through the recuperator in the Heat Exchanger again. Any excess heat is transferred to the recuperator when the air flow is forced through the recuperator. When cooling is required, external air is forced horizontally by the external fan through the recuperator where the heat transfer occurs. This air is expelled from the Heat Exchanger by the fan. The vertical and horizontal air flow circuits are isolated by the walls of the recuperator and never meet.
3.5. Temperature Sensor

The temperature sensor monitors the internal air temperature of the BTS. The sensor is located in the path of the exhaust air from the BTS. The temperature sensor is accurate to within 2 C.
Figure 5. Heat Exchanger Interface Connectors for DC Powered BTS
Figure 6. Heat Exchanger Interface Connectors for AC Powered BTS
4.1. Power Supply Connectors

The control board provides the connections for the power supply, alarm signals and the control
signals. 4.1.1. External Power Connectors The AC Heat Exchanger uses an IEC 10A inlet for the AC supply The DC Heat Exchanger uses both a 3W3 'D'-type male connector for the DC power input and an IEC 10A inlet for the AC supply to the heater. In the earlier versions of the DC Heat Exchanger only the 3W3 'D'-type male connector is f itted. Both AC and DC Heat Exchangers uses a separate earth cable.
Figure 7. External Connectors on a Heat Exchanger
4.2. Front Panel Display

The Test Switch is provided on the side of the Heat Exchanger. When actuated, the following actions are performed: Switch Internal Fan ON Switch External Fan ON Switch Heater ON Activate all Alarms (HCUA_THI, HCUA_TLO, HCUA_FAULT) Illuminate all Alarm LEDs
The Test Switch has to be depressed for a minimum of 15 seconds, in order to ensure that both Heat Exchanger fans are activated. The following LEDs are displayed on the Heat Exchanger's front panel to give a visual indication of Alarm status : Table 1.
Function Temperature Low Temperature High Operation OK System Failure
Front panel LED display

Text COLD HOT SUPPLY FAIL Colour Yellow Yellow Green Red
4.3. Alarm and Control Interface

The connector type is a panel mounted, female, 9-way 'D'-type. Table 2.
Pin 1 2 Signal DGND_AL CAB2
Alarm and control signals

Description Digital Alarm Ground Door Alarm Door Closed Door Open Connect to DGND_AL Open-circuit Connect to DGND_AL through 10k resistor Condition Electrical State
ON_OFFRC+
PSU ON/OFF Remote Control +
Remote PSU ON
Remote PSU OFF 4 5 6 ON_OFFRCDGND_AL HCUA_FAULT PSU ON/OFF Remote Control Digital Alarm Ground Gen fault in T/C sys. T/C sys. OK T/C sys. Fault 7 HCUA_THI Temperature High Temperature OK Temperature High 8 HCUA_TLO Temperature Low Temperature OK Temperature Low 9 HCUA_CTRL BTS to Heat-Ex Ctl Normal Operation BTS forces fans ON
+5V from Heat-Ex PSU
Connect to DGND_AL Open-circuit Connect to DGND_AL Open-circuit Connect to DGND_AL Open-circuit +5V from BCFA 0V from BCFA
5. OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION
The Heat Exchanger is fitted with the fuses shown in Table 3 for the AC version, Table 4 for the DC version fitted with an AC heater and Table 5 for the earlier DC version fitted with an DC heater. Table 3.
Location Control Board/Internal Fan External Fan Heater
Fuses for MOEB AC Heat Exchanger

Fuse Rating 5.0 A 1.0 A 5.0 A Fuse Type Slow blow Slow blow Slow blow
Table 4.
Location Internal Fan External Fan Heater
Fuses for MOEA DC Heat Exchanger with AC Heater

Fuse Rating 3.15 A 3.15 A 5.0 A Fuse Type Slow blow Slow blow Slow blow
Table 5.
Location Internal Fan
Fuses for the Earlier MOEA DC Heat Exchanger with DC Heater

Fuse Rating 3.15 A Fuse Type Slow blow
External Fan
3.15 A
Slow blow
6. HANDLING AND STORAGE REQUIREMENTS

Packaging is provided to ensure the physical protection for the Heat Exchanger during transportation and storage. The packaging contains: Either an AC or DC Heat Exchanger; Heat Exchanger Mounting Plate; Power Cable; Alarm and Control Cable; Earth Cable.
7. TECHNICAL DATA
Table 6.
Function Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) Weight
Heat Exchanger Dimensions

Value 475 x 483 x 321 mm 20 kg
Table 7.
Function Input Voltage Range Power Consumption Nominal Current
Electrical Values for the AC Heat Exchanger

Value 187 254 V AC 650W/800W 3.12A/3.84A
Table 8.
Function DC Input Voltage
Electrical Values for the DC Heat Exchanger with AC Heater

Value -40V DC to -60.0V DC 50W 1.0A 230V AC nominal
DC Power Consumption DC Peak Current AC Heater Supply
AC Heater Output Power AC Nominal Current
650W/800W 3.12A/3.84A
Table 9.
Function Input Voltage Power Consumption Peak Current
Electrical Values for the DC Heat Exchanger with DC Heater

Value -40V DC to -60.0V DC 650W max 18 A
Power Supply Unit PSU, B6Z 465219AE/5.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main features and functions, the functional blocks, and the external interfaces of the PSU. There are two different kinds of PSU units which produce power for the plug-in units installed in the Base Transceiver Station (BTS). The PSUA is the DC Power Supply Unit which converts 48 VDC or 60 VDC input voltage into appropriate operating voltages and the PSUB is the AC Power Supply Unit which converts 230 VAC input voltage into operating voltages. Both units can be used for GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900 applications.
Figure 1. PSU Mechanics Outline.
2.1. Features
The PSU plug-in unit consists of a control board and a power board. One of the outputs can be set to supply either 24 V (GSM 1800) or 26 V (GSM 900) voltage. The voltage is selected with a jumper on the BTS backplane. The PSU can be switched on and off with an external remote control signal when necessary. The PSU unit is equipped with overheat protection and the PSU power outputs are equipped with short circuit protection. The PSUA is capable of using either 48 VDC or 60 VDC input voltage. The input voltage range is selected with a jumper on the BTS backplane.
2.2. Operation
The PSUA provides DC power for the BTS units. It converts the 48 VDC or 60 VDC input voltage into isolated 26/24 V, +12 V, -12 V, and 5 V output voltages. The PSUB provides power for the BTS units. It converts the 230 VAC input voltage into isolated 26/24 V, +12 V, -12 V, and 5 V output voltages. Other main functions of the PSU unit are: to monitor the PSU input voltage and to send a mains alarm to the BCF when the input voltage is out of range to monitor the PSU output voltages and currents and send an output alarm to the BCF if any of the output voltages falls below the specified limit to monitor the PSU output voltages. If any of the output voltages exceeds the specified overvoltage protection limit, the PSU unit disconnects power supply to all outputs and sends an output alarm to the BCF. The overvoltage protection logic is reset by switching the unit off and on. to monitor the temperature of the PSU unit and to switch the unit off and to send a mains alarm to the BCF if the unit temperature exceeds the specified limit
2.3.
The PSU consists of three functional blocks: the power input block, the power switcher block and the control block.
Figure 2. PSU Block Diagram 2.3.1. Power Input Block The PSUA power input block consists of an input circuit and a step-up converter. The input circuit filters the input voltage and limits the inrush current. The step-up converter then converts the filtered input voltage into a stabilized intermediate voltage for the power switcher block. The PSUB power input block consists of an input circuit and a Power Factor Correction (PFC) preregulator. The input voltage is first fed through the input circuit which consists of a mains filter, an inrush current limiter and a rectifier. To improve the power factor, the input voltage is then fed through the PFC preregulator which converts a stabilized intermediate voltage for the power switcher block. The power input block also includes a DC/DC converter providing operating voltage for the control block. 2.3.2. Power Switcher Block
The power switcher block consists of three parallel-connected switched-mode circuits. The switchers convert and regulate the intermediate voltage into the isolated 5 V, +12 V, and 26/24 V output voltages. The -12 V is regulated by a linear regulator. 2.3.3. Control Block The control block consists of an input control circuit and an output control circuit which monitor and control the operation of the PSU power supply. The control block takes care of the over- and undervoltage protection, overcurrent protection, overheat protection, unit synchronization, alarm signal generation, and the unit front panel LED control. It also processes the control signal received from the BCF.
The PSU is equipped with the following interfaces: Front panel (See Figure 1): three LEDs On/off switch
Back panel: two Euroconnectors
The colours and explanations of the front panel LEDs are given in Table 1. Table 1.
PSU Front Panel LEDs

The PSU back panel connectors provide connections for the power input and output, control signal input and output, and alarm signal output. A general description of the PSUA rear panel connector pin configurations is given in Figure 3 and a general description of the PSUB rear panel connector pin configurations is given in Figure 4.
Figure 3. PSUA Rear Panel Connectors
Figure 4. PSUB Rear Panel Connectors
4. TECHNICAL DATA
efficiency > 80 % EMI/RFI complies with EN 55022 cl. B, FCC Rules Part 15 EMC complies with IEC 801, Bellcore GR-1089 safety complies with EN 60950, UL 1950 (third edition)
4.1. PSU Input and Output Voltages

Table 2. PSU Input Voltages
48 V (40.5 ... 57 V) 60 V (50 ... 75 V) 230 V (208...240 V)
PSUA Input voltage, floating (DC) PSUB Input voltage (AC)
The DC input voltage range 48 V/60 V is selected with a jumper on the BTS backplane.
Table 3.
Output No. Output Voltage (DC)
PSU Output Voltages and Corresponding Maximum Currents

1 5.1 ... 5.2 V 2 11.9 ... 12.3 V 3 -11.8 ... -12.2 V 0 ... 1.2 A 4 * 26.0 ... 27.0 V 24.0 ... 25.0 V 0 ... 17.0 A
Max Current 0 ... 28.0 A 0 ... 7.0 A * Output voltage range is selected with a jumper on the BTS backplane: - 26 V for GSM 900/GSM 1900 - 24 V for GSM 1800

Table 4. Dimensions and Weight of the PSU
PSUA Height x Width x Depth Weight 262 x 75 x 342 mm (10.3 x 3 x 13.5 in) 5 kg (11 lb) PSUB 262 x 75 x 342 mm (10.3 x 3 x 13.5 in) 5.35 kg (11.8 lb)

The power outputs of the PSU are protected against overvoltage.

Caution: The unit is sensitive to electromagnetic charges. The user should take care of proper grounding and wear an antistatic hand strap when handling the unit.
Receiver Multicoupler Unit RMU, B6Z 057335AE/4.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main functions, functional blocks, and external interfaces of the Receiver Multicoupler Unit (RMU). The RMU amplifies the received signals and divides them to the receivers (RX) of the Transceiver units (TRXs). The RMU is used together with the Remote Tune Combiner (RTC). The RMU comprises two main sections, the normal branch and the diversity branch, located on different sides of the chassis structure to provide the essential screening. RMU unit types RMUA/H/J are for GSM 900, and RMUB is for GSM 1800 applications. The RMUA and RMUB are presented in Figure 1.
Figure 1. RMUB and RMUA Mechanics Outline
2.1. Features
During tests on the antenna and the BTS, an external test signal is brought in from the TEST input connector. If the duplexer in the RTC is in use, the TX antenna supervising function of the RTC is used instead. Band-pass filtering rejects the signals that are not in the receiving band. The received signals are amplified by means of two identical amplifiers. This structure improves the reliability and performance of the unit. The amplified signals are divided into six receiver outputs (RMUA/H/J) or six receiver outputs and an extension output (RMUB). In the RMU, a separate front panel connector is used to provide the MHA voltage feed. The bias voltages of the amplifiers are checked by comparators which control the alarm lines. In addition to its own alarms, the RMU produces an alarm in case of a fault in the MHA. The MHA alarms are not, however, indicated by the RMU front panel LEDs. RMUA/H/J still support the MHP. When MHP is used, however, an LNA cable set, a Bias Tee, and a cable kit for Bias Tee are needed.
2.2. RMUA/H/J Main Functional Blocks

The main functional blocks of the RMUA/H/J are the test module, RX filter, and amplifier module.
Figure 2. RMUA/H/J Main Functional Blocks The test module directs the test signal from the Site Test Monitor (STM) directly to the receiver or to the antenna. It also controls the supply voltage to the Masthead Preamplifier (MHA) and, when necessary, produces an MHA alarm. The RX filter is a bandpass filter for the RX band. The amplifier module amplifies the incoming signals and divides them to the receiver output connectors. The bias voltages of the amplifiers are monitored and alarms are produced in case of a failure. 2.2.1. Test Module Figure 3 shows the functional blocks of the test module.
Figure 3. RMUA/H/J Test Module A test directional coupler is fitted for each of the main and diversity receive antenna inputs. The loopback signal can either be connected directly to the receiver or coupled to the receiver antenna by a switch. The RF switch is controlled by the DC voltage applied to the centre pin of the TEST connector. When the signal is coupled towards the receiver, either the loop test or the RX sensitivity measurement can be executed. The antenna Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) can be estimated by comparing the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) level to that obtained when the signal is coupled to the antenna and subsequently reflected back to the receiver. In the RMU, a separate front panel connector is used to provide the MHA voltage feed, both for main and diversity. The control comes via the amplifier module. The RMU test module monitors the MHA supply current and, in case of failure, activates an alarm (MHA_AL). 2.2.2. RX Filter Module The RX filter is a passive band-pass filter inside the RMU chassis.
Figure 4. RMUA/H/J RX Filter Module 2.2.3. Amplifier Module Figure 5 shows the functional blocks of the amplifier module.
Figure 5. RMUA/H/J Amplifier Module The Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) is a balanced amplifier which forms the front end of the receiver chain in both the normal and the diversity channels. The LNA receives the signal from its respective roofing filter and provides low noise amplification to the receiver outputs which are connected to the inputs of the TRX unit. The RMUA/H/L units have six receiver outputs. Bias currents are monitored in each amplifier stage to provide an alarm signal in the event of a failure.
2.3. RMUB Main Functional Blocks

Note: With power supply module, the term "MHP" is used. It refers to MHA. The main functional blocks of the RMUB are the RX filter (containing the RMUB test couplers), amplifier module, and MHP power supply module.
Figure 6. RMUB Main Functional Blocks The RX filter module directs the test signal from the Site Test Monitor (STM) directly to the receiver or to the antenna. The RX filter is a bandpass filter for the RX band. The amplifier module amplifies the incoming signals and divides them to the receiver output connectors. The bias voltages of the amplifiers are monitored and alarms are produced in case of a failure. Any unused outputs must be terminated with a 50 ohm load. 2.3.1. RX Filter Module The RX filter is a passive band-pass filter inside the RMU chassis. The RMUB filter module contains two test couplers.
Figure 7. RMUB RX Filter Module 2.3.2. Amplifier Module Figure 8 shows the functional blocks of the amplifier module.
Figure 8. RMUB Amplifier Module The Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) is a balanced amplifier which forms the front end of the receiver chain in both the normal and the diversity channels. The LNA receives the signal from its respective roofing filter and provides low noise amplification to the receiver outputs which are connected to the inputs of the TRX unit. The RMUB has six receiver outputs and an extension output. Bias currents are monitored in each amplifier stage to provide an alarm signal in the event of a failure. 2.3.3. MHA Power Supply Module Figure 9 shows the functional blocks of the MHA power supply module.
Figure 9. MHP Power Supply Module Blocks The MHP Power Supply Module contains a regulated power supply which is used to supply the +12.5 VDC power feed to the remotely Masthead preamplifier (MHA). The MHAs are normally fitted to both the main and diverse RX inputs. The MHAs obtain their DC power from the inner conductor of the RF coaxial cable which connects the RMUB to the MHAs. The RMUB contains two MHP power supply modules, a separate power supply module being used for the main and diverse channels. The MHA power supply is enabled by an external control signal from the BCF unit. During system VSWR measurements on the RX antenna, the MHA power supply is disabled.
3.1. Connectors
The RMUA/H/J has 16 front panel RF connectors and 2 MHA power connectors. The RMUB front panel has 18 RF connectors and 2 MHA power connectors. All RMUs have two Euroconnectors at the rear for backplane connections.
Table 1.
Connector Name ANT DIV ANT TEST DIV TEST RX 1...6 DIV RX 1..6 EXT OUT (RMUB)
RMU Interface Connections

Type N N SMA SMA SMA SMA SMA SMA SMB SMB Euroconnector Purpose Input from antenna, normal *) Input from antenna, diversity Input from STM, main Input from STM, diversity Outputs to the RX of the TRXs, main Outputs to the RX of the TRXs, diversity Extension output to the RMU, main Extension output to the RMU, diversity MHA power supply DIV MHA power supply Connections for the supply voltages, alarm lines, and MHA control, main Connections for the supply voltages, alarm lines, and MHA control, diversity
DIV EXT OUT (RMUB) MHA DIV MHA Rear connector
Rear connector
Euroconnector
*) can be connected to RTC DUP OUT connector when a common antenna is used
The pin configuration of the rear connectors is shown in Figure 10 and detailed in Table 2.
Figure 10. Pin Configuration of RMU Rear Connectors Table 2.

Pin No C1 C2 C3 C4 C9 C10 C11
RMU Pin Configuration

Signal Name +12V +12V -12V AGND AGND AGND DGND Purpose +12V power supply +12V power supply -12V power supply analog ground analog ground analog ground digital ground
C12 A1 A2 B16 (RMUB only)
DGND MHA_AL MHPCTRL +24V
digital ground Masthead Preamplifier alarm line Masthead Preamplifier control line +24V power supply

The colours and explanations of the front panel LEDs are given in Table 3. Table 3.
RMU Front Panel LEDs

4. TECHNICAL DATA
Note: The MHA current consumption is not included in the nominal current consumption in Table 4. Table 4.
Supply Voltages
Supply Voltages and Current Consumption

Maximum Current Consumption RMUA/H/J RMUB 120 mA 1360 mA 100 mA (when no current drawn from MHAs) 50 mA ... 140 mA
-12 V (analog) +12 V (analog) + 24 V (analog, RMUB only)
60 mA 600 mA -
Allowed MHA supply current consumption
65 mA ... 153 mA
Nominal power consumption: RMUA/H/J: 8 W
RMUB: 14 W

Table 5.
RMU Dimensions and Weight

262 mm (10.5 in) 62 mm (2.5 in) 287.6 mm (11.5 in) 5 kg (11 lb)
4.3. RF Frequency Ranges

Table 6.
Unit Type RMUA RMUB RMUH RMUJ
RF Frequency Ranges
RX Frequency Range 880 ... 915 MHz 1710 ... 1785 MHz 897.5 ... 915 MHz 890 ... 915 MHz

In all RMUs, the alarms and control lines are protected against 30 VDC overvoltage. Protection against overvoltage coming from the common antenna is taken care of by RTC's duplex filter. An optional surge arrester can be used in diversity antenna and in case a separate RX antenna is used. The surge arrester on the test module (RMUA/H/J) or in the MHP PSU module (RMUB) acts as the secondary overvoltage protector. Secondary protection is needed to protect the RX branch against the residual pulse of the primary surge arrester used in the RX antenna cable or cables. In the RMUB, the +12 V supply voltage to the MHA is derived from a +24V input to enable a secondary lightning protection circuit to be fitted to the unit.
Remote Tune Combiner RTC, B6Z 465525AE/5.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main features and functions, functional blocks, and external interfaces of the Remote Tune Combiner (RTC). RTCC is for GSM 900 and RTCF for GSM 1800 applications. The main function of the RTC unit is to connect up to six Transceivers (TRX) into a single Base Transceiver Station (BTS) antenna. Figure 1 shows the RTC.
Figure 1. RTC Mechanics Outline
2.1. Features
The RTC is tuned remotely to the TRX carrier frequencies. There is no need for a site visit to change the frequency because the tuning operation is fully automated by the BSC and BTS software. Duplex operation is a standard feature. The RTC supervises the antenna during the operation of the BTS. Two adjustable alarm limits are available and they limits can be defined by software. Several alarms are implemented to supervise the operation. The alarms are sent via D-bus to the BCF. SW can be downloaded remotely. HW and FW version information of the unit can be obtained remotely.
2.2. Operation
When the BTS is being set up, the BCF commands the TRX to send a dummy burst modulated RF carrier signal at the frequency to which the combiner filter will be tuned. The BCF sends a configuration message to the RTC, and the RTC starts to tune the combiner filters. The tuning is performed for each combiner filter one by one. Immediately after this the tuning is repeated starting from the first combiner filter. The second tuning corrects the mutual effect of the combiner filters. After this, the RTC is ready for use. The tuning process of the RTC is based on measuring the power of the RF carrier signal forwarding to the combiner filter and reflecting back from it. These signals are compared to each other, and the centre frequency of the combiner filter is adjusted so that the level of the reflecting power from the filter is as low as possible. During normal operation the RTC checks the condition of the combiner filters regularly and fine tunes the filters only if the forwarding power exists. In that case the filters are tuned one by one. The software of the RTC is downloadable from the BCF unit via D-bus. The software is first loaded to the controller's SRAM. If the software is found to be correct, it is loaded to flash memory and is then ready for use.
2.3. Main Blocks
Figure 2 shows the main functional blocks of the RTC: the combiner part, duplex filter part and the controller part.
Figure 2. Main Functional Parts of the RTC The main function of the combiner part is to combine the GMSK-modulated TX carrier signals coming from the TRX units into a single coaxial line with minimum insertion loss and, at the same time, to provide sufficient RF isolation between the TRXs. The main function of the duplex filter part is to connect the TX branch and the RX branch of the BTS to the same BTS antenna with minimum insertion loss and with high stop-band attenuation. This part also produces the VSWR signal for BTS antenna supervision. The main function of the controller part is to control the operation of the unit itself but it also handles the communication between the RTC and the BCF via the D-bus. 2.3.1. Combiner Part The combiner part of the RTC consists of six combiner filters and a summing network. Figure 3
shows the functional blocks of the combiner part.
Figure 3. Functional Blocks of Combiner Part The GMSK-modulated TX carriers from the TRXs are connected to the inputs of the combiner part. Isolators in the inputs provide both good wideband matching for the carriers and the RF isolation needed between the inputs. The isolators also produce the sample signals Pf (forwarding power) and Pr (reflecting power) required for the tuning of the RTC. From the isolators the carriers are connected to the combiner filters. These filters are individually tuned to the carrier frequencies. The centre frequencies of the combiner filters are tuned by the stepper motors which receive control signals (M) from the controller part. The combiner filters have very narrow bandwidth and low insertion loss. The narrow bandwidth of the filters provides frequency-dependent attenuation between the filter input and output. This makes it possible to
connect the outputs together with a reasonably low insertion loss. The combiner filters also provide the high attenuation required in the RX band. The outputs of the combiner filters are connected into a single coaxial line by means of the summing network consisting of coaxial cables of critical length. 2.3.2. Duplex Filter Part The duplex filter consists of two bandpass filters: one for the TX branch and the other for the RX branch of the BTS. The duplex filter part also produces the signal for the antenna VSWR measurement. Figure 4 shows the functional blocks of the duplex filter part.
Figure 4. Functional Blocks of the Duplex Filter Part The combined TX carriers coming from the combiner part of the RTC are connected to the BTS antenna through the TX bandpass filter and the VSWR measuring part. The pass-band of the filter covers the whole TX band with minimum insertion loss. The filter provides the high stop-band attenuation that is required to limit the level of spurious frequencies and intermodulation products in the RX band. The RX signals coming from the antenna are connected to the BTS RX branch through the VSWR measuring part and the RX bandpass filter. The pass-band of the filter covers the whole RX band with minimum insertion loss and the stop-band of the filter rejects effectively the spurious frequencies coming from the antenna and from the TX branch. The VSWR measuring part provides the BTS with antenna supervision. The signal VSWR is proportional to the VSWR of the antenna. The TEST OUT signal is a sample signal for the RF test loop function of the BTS. 2.3.3. Controller Part The controller part of the RTC consists of two selectors (Pf and Pr), VCO/synthesiser, controller, and motor driver parts. Figure 5 shows the functional blocks of the controller part.
Figure 5. Functional Blocks of the Controller Part The selectors select one pair of the sample signals Pf and Pr from one of the six combiner filters. The signals are connected to the mixers where the sample signals are mixed with the LO (Local Oscillator) signal from the VCO/synthesiser. The sample signals are first mixed to the IF frequency, then filtered and taken to the controller. The IF frequency signals are further filtered and rectified in the controller and then transferred to the A/D-converters. The converted signals are used for the tuning process. The whole tuning process, including the selection of the sample signals, the frequency of the LO signal, and the driving of the motor drivers, is controlled by the controller. It also supervises the BTS antenna, collects all the RTC alarms and carries out the communication with the BCF unit via D-bus. The motor driver generates the control signals (M) for the stepper motors, the function of which is to tune the filters in the combiner part. The controller contains the supervision and protection circuits for the input supply voltages. The unit address of the RTC is received from the input supply voltage connector.
3. INTERFACES
3.1. Connectors
All connectors are on the RTC front panel. Table 1.
Connector Name ANTENNA RX OUT TX1...TX6 TEST OUT PWR IN D-BUS IN D-BUS OUT
RTC Interface Connectors

Type 7/16 connector, female N connector, female N connector, female SMA connector, female 37-pin D-connector, male 15-pin D-connector, female 15-pin D-connector, female Purpose Antenna connector to the BTS-antenna feeder cable Output to the RMU RTC input connector for TRX transmitters Signal output connector for testing purpose Power supply connector Connector for the D-bus Connector for the extension of the D-bus
3.2. Pin Configurations
Table 2.
BCF Connector Signal name TDAT2+ RDAT2+ CK2M+ DGND +5V (bias) +5V (relay) DGND (relay) SCK2M+ TDAT2RDAT2CK2Mnc DGND (bias) DGND SCK2M-
D-BUS IN and D-BUS OUT Connectors

Pin RTC Connectors D-BUS_IN Signal name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 TDAT2+ RDAT2+ CK2M+ nc on board nc on board/in D-bus cable DB_+5V (relay) DB_DGND (relay) SCK2M+ TDAT2RDAT2CK2MDB_+5V (relay) nc on board DB_DGND SCK2MD-BUS_OUT Signal name TDAT2+ RDAT2+ CK2M+ DGND TXD (for service purposes) DB_+5V (relay) DB_DGND (relay) SCK2M+ TDAT2RDAT2CK2MRCTRL RXD (for service purposes) DB_DGND SCK2M-
Table 3.
Signal name DGND +24V/+26V +12V AGND DGND RTCUA0 RTCUA1
PWR IN Connector
Pin 1 17 18 19 20 31 32 From TRX backplane TRX backplane TRX backplane TRX backplane TRX backplane TRX backplane TRX backplane Description Digital GrounND Power supply (RTCF +24V, RTCC +26V) Power supply +12V Analog GrounND Digital GrouND RTC Unit Address bit 0 RTC Unit Address bit 1
+5V +5V +24V/+26V -12V AGND
33 34 35 36 37
TRX backplane TRX backplane TRX backplane TRX backplane TRX backplane
Power supply +5V Power supply +5V Power supply (RTCF +24V, RTCC +26V) Power supply -12V Analog GrouND
The other pins are reserved for AFE unit use.
4. TECHNICAL DATA
Table 4.

402 mm (16 in) 152 mm (6 in) 367.5 mm (14.7 in) RTCF 14 kg (30.8 lb) RTCC 15 kg (33 lb)
4.2. Power Consumption

Table 5.
Supply Voltages +5 V (digital) -12 V (analog) +12 V (analog) +24 V (analog) RTCF + 26 V (analog) RTCC
Power Consumption
Nominal Current Consumption 400 mA 150 mA 450 mA 200 mA
Nominal power consumption is 14 W.
4.3. RF Characteristics
Table 6. RF Characteristics
RTCF TX frequency range RX frequency range Carrier frequency spacing Insertion loss (TX) Insertion loss (RX) TX power in the input Number of TX-carriers combined into one antenna Antenna VSWR supervision range VSWR at input Tuning time 1805 - 1880 MHz 1710 - 1785 MHz 800 kHz min. See Table 8 0.7 dB 40 W max. 1-6 TX 1.2 ... 3.5 1.4 60 seconds
RTCC 925 - 960 MHz 880 - 915 MHz 600 kHz min. See Table 7
4.4. Insertion Loss (TX)

Table 7.
Number of Cavities 1 2 3 4 5 6
Typical Insertion Loss [dB], RTCC (GSM 900)

Spacing min. 600 kHz 2.5 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 Spacing 1.2 MHz 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
Table 8.
Number of Cavities 1 2 3 4 5
Typical Insertion Loss [dB], RTCF (GSM 1800)

Spacing min. 800 kHz 2.7 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Spacing 1.6 MHz 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7
3.5
2.7

Overvoltage/current protection is arranged with fuses and a current limiter (+5 V) in the power supply lines.

The unit must always be handled with care. The considerable weight of the unit must be taken into account during handling. The RF power resistors (inside the isolators) in the RTC contain BeO (Beryllium Oxide).
System Interface Unit SIFA, B6Z 465942AE/3.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
The System Interface Unit (SIFA) functions as an inner interface between units in the battery backup system and between the battery back up system and BTS. The unit can be used in the Nokia Extratalk cabinet with the BBUC unit for GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900 applications. This document describes the functions and features, functional blocks and external interfaces of the SIFA.
Figure 1. SIFA Unit Mechanics Outline
2.1. Operation
The battery backup system consists of rectifiers, batteries, a temperature probe, a deep discharge relay, fuses, and the System Interface Unit (SIFA). The SIFA unit controls and monitors the operation of the different units and sends alarms to the BCF unit when needed. 2.1.1. Main Functions The main functions of the SIFA unit are: to monitor the battery backup system for undervoltage to collect the mains input alarms sent by the rectifiers (BBU) when the input voltage is out of range, and to pass them on to the BCF to monitor the rectifier output and take care that the distribution load is divided evenly between the rectifiers to monitor the battery temperature and pass the information on to the rectifiers which control the charging voltage accordingly to monitor the status of the battery fuse and the distribution fuses and the status of the deep discharge relay, and to light the red fault LED on every rectifier if any of the fuses has blown or the deep discharge relay is in a wrong position to monitor the batteries for undervoltage and to disconnect them when necessary to perform the battery test when commanded without disturbing the normal BTS operation to send the appropriate alarms to the BCF when needed
2.1.2. Alarms The SIFA sends following types of alarms to the BCF when needed: mains Breakdown alarm when a rectifier is not capable of feeding the distribution load either because the mains input voltage is too low or the rectifier overtemperature protection is activated Backup Battery Low alarm when the battery voltage is too low Charging Failure alarm when there is a faulty rectifier or the rectifier output overvoltage protection is activated. Or when any of the distribution fuses has blown or the deep discharge relay is in a wrong position.
The SIFA unit controls and alarms are illustrated in Figure 2.
Figure 2. Alarms and Controls of the SIFA Unit
2.2. Blocks
The SIFA unit consists of two main functional blocks; the voltage regulator and the control logic.
Figure 3. SIFA Block Diagram Voltage regulator The voltage regulator block regulates the operation voltages for the control logic, the temperature probe, and the temperature compensation device. Control logic The control logic block processes the information received from the batteries, rectifiers, sensors, and the fuses and performs the appropriate control and alarm functions when necessary.
The SIFA front panel is equipped with an extension connector (not used). At the back of the unit there is an Euroconnector providing interface connections between the battery backup system units, and between the battery backup system and the BCF. A general description of the rear connector pin configuration is given in Figure 4.
Figure 4. Front and Rear Panel Connectors
4. TECHNICAL DATA
Input voltage (DC): 54 V Input current (DC): 100 mA Table 1. Dimensions and Weight of the SIFA
262 x 25 x 307 mm (10.3 x 1 x 12.1 in) 0.36 kg (0.79 lb)
Site Test Monitor Unit STMD/E, B6Z 465532AE/4.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main features, functions, and interfaces of the Site Test Monitor units STMD (GSM 900) and STME (GSM 1800). The STMD/E is an optional test equipment designed for the GSM 900/GSM 1800 Base Transceiver Station (BTS) for monitoring, diagnostics, and commissioning. STMD/E tests can be made locally with the MMI or remotely from the Base Station Controller (BSC) or the Network Management System (NMS). The STMD/E can be used as a link between the Receiver (RX) and Transceiver (TX) bands and as a normal GSM 900 or GSM 1800 Mobile Station (MS). An STM antenna is required to maximise the full potential of the STMD/E.
Figure 1. STMD Mechanics Outline
2.1. Features
The following are the general features of the STMD/E: STM Loop A sample from the TRX is looped to the receiving band of the MS and decoded. The MS then codes the sample and transmits it to the BTS RX. Decoding and coding are performed digitally. Audio Loop during STM Test Call (speech echo) The STMD/E first decodes the incoming signal and then codes it back into an outgoing signal. The user's voice is looped back in the STMD/E. Software Downloading STMD/E software can be downloaded remotely from the BSC. Uplink Measurement The STMD/E sends a signal to the BTS receiver for measurements. This information is then sent to the BCF. Downlink Measurement The STMD/E receives a signal from the transmitter and measures its level and quality. This information is sent to the BCF. STMD/E Output Dynamic Range The BTS RX test signal level ranges from -110 dBm to -54 dBm in 2 dB steps. The STMD/E sends different signal levels to the receiver, and the bit error ratio (BER) can be calculated and analysed in the BTS. RX Antenna Test Support The STMD/E supports the receiver antenna test. STM Saving Feature
The STM saving feature automatically switches off the MS power after 60 minutes if the STM is not used during that time. The STM saving feature can be enabled (default) and disabled with the Handset ('saveon', 'saveoff'). This setting can be checked by pressing the Menu key. Optional Handset The handset can be used to make and receive test calls and to carry out BCCH measurements. The STM saving feature can be enabled or disabled with the Handset. Changeable SIM Card The SIM card for the GSM 900 or GSM 1800 MS in the STMD/E is easy to replace.
2.2. STMD/E Tests

The STMD/E provides the following BTS tests: Loop Test via Cable or via Air The STMD/E loop test tests the RF parts, the digital parts, and the analog parts of the BTS. The BTS antennas are also tested when the air connection is used. The STMD/E loops the signal from the BTS TX to the BTS RX. STM Originating Test Call The STM originating test call tests the operation of the BSS. During the test call the STMD/E operates as a normal Mobile. The STMD/E audio loop (speech echo) can be used to verify the success of the call. The test call is made with the STMD/E via the cell the STM is installed in or via the neighbouring cells. STM Terminating Test Call The STM terminating test call tests the operation of the BSS. During the test call the STMD/E operates as a normal Mobile. The STMD/E audio loop (speech echo) is used to verify the success of the call. The test call to the STMD/E is made remotely or locally with any phone via the cell the STM is installed in or via the neighbouring cells. When the MS is idle, it is not possible to make a terminating test call to the STM unit. It is necessary to make any test call other than a terminating test call with the STM unit to activate the MS. BCCH Signal Strength Measurement via STM Antenna The BCCH signal strength measurement measures the BCCH power level in the cell the STMD/E is located in or in the neighbouring cells. A maximum of six BCCH levels can be measured automatically. RX Sensitivity Measurement RX sensitivity measurement consists of several loop tests and it checks the sensitivity of the selected RX. The outgoing signal level to the RX is decreased or increased for each loop test until the
specified BER value is reached. RX Antenna Test RX antenna test consist of two loop tests and checks the condition of the RX antenna. In the first loop test (verification measurement) the RF signal is directed to the RX. In the second loop test, the RF signal is directed to the RX antenna. The BCF calculates the Standing Wave Ratio (SWR) of the antenna on the basis of the signal level reflected from the RX antenna and the signal level of the verification measurement.
2.3. Operation
Start-Up During start-up, the STMD/E performs several self-tests. After the tests, the unit sends a HW report to the BCF. If errors are detected during testing, the BCF resets the STMD/E. If any errors occur after three resets, the BCF sets the STMD/E to 'Out of order' state. Normal Operation The STMD/E functions as BTS test equipment. The tests are made with the MMI, or from the BSC or the NMS. STMD/E software manages the test procedures and the HW modules. The STMD/E controls its internal Mobile and sets it to the mode required for the test. Alarms If the STMD/E detects a fault during its normal operation, it sends an alarm report to the BCF. STMD/E Tests and Reporting The STMD/E receives a command from the BCF to start the tests. After the test the STMD/E receives the test results from the MS, compiles a report and sends it to the BCF. Main Blocks The STMD/E contains four main functional blocks: the RF coupling module, the sector switch module, the control module and the GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS. The main blocks are presented in Figure 2.
Figure 2. Main Functional Parts of STMD/E The STMD/E has the following main functional parts: Control Module The control module contains a unit controller which communicates with the BCF via the D-bus. The control module controls the GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS and the RF coupling module and provides operating voltages for all the modules in the STM unit. RF Coupling Module The RF coupling module couples the RF signals according to the serial data received from the control module. Three attenuation steps are provided for RX test signals. The main RX or the diversity RX
can be selected separately for RX antenna measurements. The RF coupling module also supplies the control voltage to the multicoupler for the RX antenna test and provides the STMD/E antenna connection. Sector Switch Module The sector switch module provides the cable connection to a sectored BTS with the maximum of three sectors. GSM 900/GSM 1800 Mobile Station The GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS is a normal, portable NOKIA MS with specific SW to be used with the STMD/E. The functions of the MS are controlled via the M2bus and the D-bus. The SIM card can be installed in the MS by the operator. Handset (optional) The handset is a GSM 900 or GSM 1800 Mobile handset with M2bus support, display, and keys.
3.1. Control Module
The control module controls the RF switches and the MS according to commands received from the BCF.
Figure 3. Functional Blocks of Control Module
The control module consists of the following blocks: Processor Block The processor block controls the operation of the control board. This block consists of a microprocessor, address latches, input latches, and output latches. Memory Block The memory block contains the data storage devices for the processor block. The memory block includes static RAM and flash memory for the unit SW. Serial Block The serial block contains the serial interfaces (D-bus and M2bus) to and from the MS. DBIA Block The D-bus Interface Adapter (DBIA) block contains one D-bus interface. All D-bus messages to the BTS are sent and received via this interface. The clock for the processor is also located in this block. Power Block The power block supplies and supervises operating voltages for all the modules in the unit. The LED control is also located in this block.
3.2. RF Coupling Module
Figure 4. Functional Blocks of RF Coupling Module The RF coupling module consists of the following blocks:
RF IN Attenuator The 50 dB attenuator is located between the RF IN connector and the directional coupler. To prevent coupling and to improve isolation between the MS and RF IN, the attenuator is constructed of the following mechanically separated blocks: an attenuator, an amplifier, a shunt RF switch, and a power dissipative attenuator. The amplifier can be switched off to increase isolation in the loop test via air. Directional Coupler RF signals to and from the MS are fed via an antenna switch to a directional coupler which picks up the signals. From the coupler the signals are fed to the RF level control switches. Antenna Switch With the antenna switch, RF signals from the MS can be directed either to the STM ANT connector located on the front panel, or to the directional coupler. The antenna path contains a selectable 20 dB power attenuator. RF Level Control Switches Selection of the RF level control switches sets the desired Main and Diverse receiver outputs. Control Logic The control module produces all supply voltages and control signals. The +5 V/ 0 V control voltages for the RX antenna measurement control can be fed individually for both RF outputs via an inductor. These signals are used to control the antenna test directional coupler in either the AFE or the RMU.
3.3. Sector Switch Module
Figure 5. Functional Blocks of Sector Switch Module
The sector switch consists of the following blocks: RF IN Selection from Sectors 1A - 3A and 1B - 3B With two AFEs per sector, both A and B RF inputs are used. Transceiver (TX) signals from the antenna coupling modules are fed to each sector input, and the required sector signal is selected by the switch which is controlled by the control logic. RF OUT Selection to Sectors 1-3 The signal from the STMD/E RF coupling module is directed to the front end test input of the receiver in the selected sector. The sector is selected with a switch. The antenna test controlling signal from the RF coupling module is also directed to the coaxial line of the selected sector. RF DIV OUT to Sectors 1-3 The diversity signal from the STMD/E RF coupling module is directed to the front end test input of the receiver in the selected sector. The sector is selected with a switch. The antenna test controlling signal from the RF coupling module is also directed to the coaxial line of the selected sector. Control Logic The sector switch module uses standard linear regulators to regulate the required supplies. The unregulated +12 V supply voltage is for the amplifier. The antenna test control signals (0 V/5 V) are taken from coaxial centre pins coming from the RF coupling module. The control signals are then directed by logical ports to the selected sector so that each sector output (outputs 1, 2, and 3) can be controlled separately.
3.4. GSM 900/GSM 1800 Mobile Station

The GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS is a normal, type approved, portable NOKIA MS with specific STM software. The functions of the MS can be controlled via MS internal bus. The power level of the MS TX can be set for the STM loop test made with the MMI. The power control range is +13 - +33 dBm (GSM 900) and +10 - +30 dBm (GSM 1800) in 2 dB steps.
3.5. Handset
The handset can be connected to the front panel HANDSET connector on the STMD/E. With the handset in the 'serv' mode, the user can see the field strength and the current state of the STMD/E. With the handset, the user can also: set the selected carrier number for the MS, start the BCCH field strength measurement, make an originating test call, answer to an incoming call,
and enable or disable the STM saving feature.
3.6. Antenna
The antenna in the STMD/E unit is required for measurements via air. Isolation requirement between the BTS RX and TX connectors and the STM antenna is 75 dB to 95 dB. The radiation pattern of the antenna can be directional or omnidirectional and polarisation is vertical. The antenna cable is connected to the STM ANT connector on the STMD/E front panel.
The STMD/E has 15 interface connectors: 1 on the rear panel and 14 on the front panel. The rear connector is an Euroconnector. The front panel has 13 RF connectors and one modular jack for handset connection. Table 1.
Connector Name IN 1A-3A IN 1B-3B OUT 1-3 DIV OUT 1-3 STM ANT HANDSET X1
STMD/E Connectors
Type SMA SMA SMA SMA SMA Modular connector Euroconnector Purpose RF input from the antenna coupling unit (sectors 1 - 3) RF input from the antenna coupling unit (sectors 1 - 3) RF output to the antenna coupling unit (sectors 1 - 3) Diversity RF output to the antenna coupling unit (sectors 1 3) RF output/input to the STM external antenna Handset connector Back panel connections for the BTS D-bus and powers +12 V,-12 V, +5 V,+26 V (GSM 900), +24 V (GSM 1800). See Appendix 1 for details.
Table 2.
Signal a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 DGND AGND +5 V +5 V +5 V +12 V +5 V -12 V DGND +12 V -12 V
Connector X1 Pin Configuration
b DGND DGND +5 V +5 V +5 V +12 V +5 V -12 V DGND AGND +12 V AGND -12 V AGND
c DGND DGND +5 V +5 V +5 V +12 V +5 V -12 V DGND +12 V -12 V
15 16 17 18 19 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
AGND AGND +26 V/ +24 V AGND DCL+
AGND AGND AGND AGND +26 V/ +24 V +26 V/ +24 V AGND DGND
AGND AGND +26 V/ +24 V AGND DCLAGND DGND JTAG_TDE JTAG_TRST CK2M
JTAG_TCK TDAT2 D2_DRIVER_EN AGND
JTAG_TDO JTAG_TDI DGND RDAT2 DGND AGND
DGND
5. TECHNICAL DATA
Table 3.
Supply Voltages 5 V (digital) -12 V (analog) +12 V (analog) +26 V (analog) (GSM 900) +24 V (analog) (GSM 1800)
STMD/E Electrical Values

Nominal Current Consumption 500 mA 300 mA 450 mA 1000 mA 1000 mA
Nominal power consumption is 36 W. Overvoltage protection is provided with the fuses in the control module. Table 4.
STMD/E Dimensions and Weight

245 mm (9.8 in) 60 mm (2.4 in) 290 mm (11.6 in) 4.3kg (9.5 lb)
Table 5.
STMD/E Frequency Range and Power Control

890 - 915 MHz (GSM 900), 1710 - 1785 MHz (GSM 1800) 935 - 960 MHz (GSM 900), 1805 - 1880 MHz (GSM 1800) 2 W (GSM 900), 1 W (GSM 1800)
TX Frequency Range RX Frequency Range MS TX Output Power
TX Dynamic Power Control MS TX Power Control Step
20 dB 2 dB
Table 6.
Options Handset Type Antenna
STMD/E Options
Possible Selection Nokia HSE-1 or HSE-2 3 - 11 dBi, Omnidirectional 7 - 19 dBi, Directional
Portable Site Test Monitor Unit STMP, B6Z 465935AE/3.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main features and functions of the GSM 900/GSM 1800 Portable Site Test Monitor unit STMP, the functional blocks and the external interfaces. The STMP is used in commissioning and testing Nokia Flexitalk GSM 900/GSM 1800 BTSs. As there is not enough space for the STMD/E unit in the BTS cabinet, the STMP must be used to connect the STMD/E unit to the Nokia Flexitalk BTS. With the STMP and the STMD/E, all STM tests can be made locally with the MMI. Note: The STMD or the STME unit is not automatically delivered with the STMP but either one of the units has to be ordered from the manufacturer.
Figure 1. STMP Testing Environment Note: The STMP is intended to be used in commissioning and in fault finding in BTS.
Disconnect the STMP from the BTS after you have performed the tasks required.
2.1. Features
The general features of the STMP are: The STMP is used to connect the STMD/E unit to the Nokia Flexitalk BTS. The STMD/E unit is easy to install in and remove from the STMP briefcase. All STMD/E tests can be made with the MMI. SW can be downloaded to the STMD/E. The STMP comprises a briefcase, a handset, an STM antenna (with an external 20 dB attenuator) and an adapter module. All RF parts used with the STMP cover the GSM 900/GSM 1800 RF band.
2.2. STMD/E Tests

The STMP is an optional BTS unit. All tests that can be performed with the STMD/E can also be performed with the STMP. The STMD/E provides the following BTS tests: STM Originating Test Call The STM originating test call tests the operation of the BSS. During the test call the STMD/E operates as a normal GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS. The STMD/E audio loop (speech echo) can be used to verify the success of the call. The test call is made with the STMD/E via the cell the STM is installed in or via the neighbouring cells. STM Terminating Test Call The STM terminating test call tests the operation of the BSS. During the test call the STMD/E operates as a normal GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS. The STMD/E audio loop (speech echo) is used to verify the success of the call. The test call to the STMD/E is made remotely or locally with any phone via the cell the STM is installed in or via the neighbouring cells. BCCH Signal Strength Measurement via STM Antenna The BCCH signal strength measurement measures the BCCH power level. The STMD/E can measure the BCCH power level in the cell the STMD/E is located in and also the BCCH power levels in the neighbouring cells. A maximum of six BCCH levels can be measured automatically. Loop Test via Cable or via Air
The STMD/E loop test tests the RF parts, the digital parts and the analog parts of the BTS. The BTS antennas are also tested when the Air connection (the STM antenna) is used. The STMD/E loops the signal from the BTS TX (transmitter) to the BTS RX (receiver). Receiver Antenna Measurement The receiver antenna measurement tests the condition of the RX antenna. The test consists of two loop tests. In the first loop test (verification measurement) the RF signal is directed to the RX. In the second loop test, the RF signal is directed to the RX antenna. The BCF calculates the Standing Wave Ratio (SWR) of the antenna on the basis of the signal level reflected from the RX antenna and the signal level of the verification measurement. Receiver Sensitivity Measurement The receiver sensitivity measurement tests the sensitivity of the selected RX. The test consists of several loop tests. The outgoing signal level to the RX is decreased or increased for each loop test until the specified bit error rate (BER) is reached.
2.3. Operation
Start-Up During the start-up, the STMD/E performs several self-tests. It sends a HW report to the BCF after the tests. If errors are detected during testing, the BCF resets the STMD/E. If any errors occur after three resets, the BCF sets the STMD/E to 'Out of order' state. Normal Operation The STMP functions as BTS test equipment. The tests are carried out with the MMI. STMD/E SW manages the test procedures and the HW modules. The STMD/E controls the MS inside the STMD/E and sets it to the mode required for the test. Alarms If the STMD/E detects a fault during normal operation, it sends an alarm report to the BCF. The BCF forwards the alarms to the BSC and the MMI. STMD/E Tests and Reporting The BCF sends a command to the STMD/E to start the tests. After the test procedure is completed, the STMD/E receives the test results from its GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS. The STMD/E compiles a test report and sends it to the BCF.
2.4. Main Blocks

The STMP contains the following main functional blocks: the adapter module, the handset and the
STMD/E unit containing the RF coupling module, the sector switch module, the control module and the GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS. The main blocks are presented in Figure 2.
Figure 2. Main Functional Parts of the STMP The STMP comprises the following main functional parts: Adapter Module The adapter module is used for connecting power and the D-bus to the STMD/E. The signal level in the D-bus coming from the BCF is RS 485 which the adapter module converts to a CMOS level suitable for the DBIA (inside the STMD/E).
Handset (optional) The handset is a GSM 900/GSM 1800 Mobile handset with a display and keys. RF Coupling Module The RF coupling module couples RF signals according to the serial data received from the control module. Three attenuation steps are provided for RX test signals. The main RX or the diversity RX can be selected separately for RX antenna measurements. The RF coupling module also supplies the control voltage to the multicoupler for the RX antenna test and provides the STMP antenna connection. Sector Switch Module Nokia Flexitalk has only one sector. Therefore, sector selection is not needed. Control Module Control module contains a unit controller which communicates with the BCF via the D-bus. The control module controls the GSM 900/GSM 1800 Mobile and the RF coupling module and provides operating voltages for all the modules in the unit. GSM 900/GSM 1800 Mobile The GSM 900/GSM 1800 Mobile is a normal, portable NOKIA GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS with specific SW to be used with the STMD/E. The functions of the MS are controlled via the M2Bus and the D-bus. The SIM card can be installed by the operator. STM Antenna The STMP includes an antenna for the STMD/E and an external 20 dB attenuator for the antenna line.
3.1. Adapter Module
The adapter module is used for connecting power and the D-bus to the STMP.
Figure 3. Adapter Module
3.2. Handset
The handset is connected to the front panel HANDSET connector of the STM unit. With the handset in the 'serv' mode, the user can see the field strength and the current state of the STM. With the handset, the user can also: set the selected carrier number for the GSM 900/GSM 1800 Mobile, start the BCCH field strength measurement, make an originating test call, and answer to an incoming call.
3.3. STMP Antenna

The STMP antenna is a magnetically mounted whip antenna which can be installed near the BTS. The STMP antenna is used for the STM loop tests and STM test calls via antennas. The same antenna is used with both GSM 900 and GSM 1800 frequencies with the STMP. The STMP antenna line has an external 20 dB attenuator. Also, the internal attenuator inside the STMD/E (0/20 dB) can be used. Recommendation: The external attenuator should be kept connected to the STM ANT connector. The attenuator should be used with all STM tests via air. If, however, during tests via air the BTS RX level or the STM RX level is -95 dBM or lower, the external attenuator should be disconnected from the STM ANT connector. The antenna cable is three meters long.
3.4. Cable Set

The cable set includes a power cable, a D-bus cable and three RF cables. All the cables are 2.5 meters long. Adapters (stubs) can be installed to the cables. Thus, if the cable connectors wear out, only the adapter has to be changed instead of the whole RF cable.
3.5. Briefcase
All parts of the STMP are installed and fastened in a briefcase. The briefcase provides sufficient shelter to the modules, particularly to the STM unit, during transportation. The STM unit is fastened to the briefcase with belts.
Note: The cover of the briefcase can be closed during testing with the STM
3.6. Control Module inside the STMD/E

The control module controls the RF switches and the GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS according to the commands received from the BCFx.
Figure 4. Functional Blocks of the Control Module The control module consists of the following blocks: Processor Block The processor block controls the operation of the control board. This block consists of a microprocessor, address latches, input latches, and output latches. Memory Block The memory block contains the data storage devices for the processor block. The memory block includes static RAM and flash memory for the unit SW. Serial Block The serial block contains the serial interfaces (D-bus and M2bus) to and from the GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS. DBIA Block The D-bus Interface Adapter (DBIA) block contains the D-bus interface from the BTS for D-bus communications. The clock for the processor is also located in this block. Power Block The power block supplies and supervises operating voltages for all the modules in the STMD/E unit. The LED control is also located in this block.
3.7. RF Coupling Module inside the STMD/E
Figure 5. Functional Blocks of the RF Coupling Module The RF coupling module consists of the following blocks:
RF IN Attenuator The 50 dB attenuator is located between the RF IN connector and the directional coupler. To prevent coupling and to improve isolation between the GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS and RF IN, the attenuator is constructed of the following mechanically separated blocks: an attenuator, an amplifier, a shunt RF switch, and a power dissipative attenuator. The amplifier can be switched off to increase isolation in the loop test via air. Directional Coupler RF signals to and from the GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS are fed via an antenna switch to a directional coupler which picks up the signals. From the coupler the signals are fed to the RF level control switches. Antenna Switch With the antenna switch, RF signals from the GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS can be directed either to the STM ANT connector located on the front panel, or to the directional coupler. The antenna path contains a selectable 20 dB power attenuator. RF Level Control Switches Selection of the RF level control switches sets the desired Main and Diverse receiver outputs. Control Logic The control module produces all supply voltages and control signals. The +5 V/0 V control voltages for the RX antenna measurement control can be fed individually for both RF outputs via an inductor. These signals are used to control the antenna test directional coupler in either the AFE or the RMU.
3.8. Sector Switch Module inside the STMD/E
Figure 6. Functional Blocks of the Sector Switch Module.
RF Connections Transceiver (TX) signals from the antenna coupling module are fed to 1A connector. The signal from the STM RF coupling module is directed to the front end test input of the receiver. The antenna test controlling signal from the RF coupling module is directed to the coaxial line. The diversity signal from the STM RF coupling module is directed to the front end test input of the receiver. The antenna test controlling signal from the RF coupling module is directed to the coaxial line. Control Logic The sector switch module uses standard linear regulators to regulate the required supplies. The unregulated +12 V supply voltage is for the amplifier. The antenna test control signals (0 V/5 V) are taken from coaxial centre pins coming from the RF coupling module. The control signals are then directed by logical ports to the selected sector so that each sector output (outputs 1, 2, and 3) can be controlled separately.
3.9. GSM 900/GSM 1800 Mobile inside the STMD/E

The GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS is a normal, type approved, portable NOKIA GSM 900/GSM 1800 MS with specific SW to be used with the STMD/E. The functions of the MS can be controlled via mobile internal bus. The power level of the MS TX can be set for the STMD/E loop test. The power control range is +13 dBm - +33 dBm (GSM 900) and +10 dBm - +30 dBm (GSM 1800) in 2 dB steps.
4.1. STM Power Connector
Voltage supply lines are connected with a cable from the Nokia Flexitalk BTS's STM connector to the STMP. The BTS connector is a 9 pin female D-type connector. Table 1.
Pin 1 2 3 4
STM Power Connector

Signal +5V DGND +26 V (GSM 900)/ +24V (GSM 1800) DGND
5 6 7 8 9
+5V +12V DGND DGND -12V
Figure 7. STM Power Connector on the BTS
4.2. D2-Bus Connector

D2-bus lines are connected with a cable from the BCF's RTC connector to the STMP. The BCF connector is a 15 pin female D-type connector. Table 2.
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
D2-Bus Connector
Signal TDAT2+ RDAT2+ CK2M+ DGND +5V (bias) +5V (relay) DGND (relay)
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SCK2M+ TDAT2RDAT2CK2MNC DGND (bias) DGND SCK2M-
Figure 8. D2-bus RTC Connector on the BCF
4.3. STMD/E HW Interface

The STMD/E Euroconnector is connected to the Adapter Module. It is a female 3 * 32 connector on the STMD/E unit. Table 3. Euroconnector Pin Configuration
Signal a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 DGND AGND +5 V +5 V +5 V +12 V +5 V -12 V DGND +12 V -12 V AGND AGND +26 V/ +24 V AGND DCL+ b DGND DGND +5 V +5 V +5 V +12 V +5 V -12 V DGND AGND +12 V AGND -12 V AGND AGND AGND AGND AGND +26 V/ +24 V +26 V/ +24 V AGND DGND c DGND DGND +5 V +5 V +5 V +12 V +5 V -12 V DGND +12 V -12 V AGND AGND +26 V/ +24 V AGND DCLAGND DGND JTAG_TDE JTAG_TRST CK2M
JTAG_TCK TDAT2 D2_DRIVER_EN AGND
JTAG_TDO JTAG_TDI DGND RDAT2 DGND AGND
DGND
4.4. STMD/E Interface Description

The STMD/E has 15 interface connectors: one on the rear panel and 14 on the front panel. The rear connector is of the Euroconnector type. The front panel has 13 RF connectors and one modular jack for handset connection. Table 4.
Connector name IN 1A-3A IN 1B-3B OUT 1-3 DIV OUT 1-3 STM ANT HANDSET
STMD/E Interface Connectors

Type SMA SMA SMA SMA SMA Modular connector Purpose RF Input from antenna coupling unit (sectors 1 - 3) RF Input from antenna coupling unit (sectors 1 - 3) RF output to antenna coupling unit (sectors 1 - 3) Diversity RF output to antenna coupling unit (sectors 1 - 3) RF output to the STM external antenna Handset connector
X1
Euroconnector
Back panel connections for BTS D-bus and powers +12 V,-12 V, +5 V,+26 V. See Table 3 for details.
5. TECHNICAL DATA
Table 5.
Supply Voltages 5 V (digital) -12 V (analog) +12 V (analog) +26 V (analog) (GSM 900) +24 V (analog) (GSM 1800)
Electrical Values of STMP with STMD/E

Current Consumption, Nominal 550 mA 300 mA 450 mA 1000 mA 1000 mA
The nominal power consumption is 36 W. Table 6.

Dimensions and Weight of STMD/E

245 mm (9.8 in) 60 mm (2.4 in) 290 mm (11.6 in) 3.5 kg (7.7 lb)
Table 7.
Dimensions and Weight of the STMP

150 mm (6 in) 410 mm (16.4 in) 340 mm (13.6 in) 11.1 kg (24.4 lb) with the STMD/E unit inside the STMP 6.8 kg (14.9 lb) without the STMD/E unit
Table 8.
STMP Frequency Range and Power Control

890 - 915 MHz (GSM 900) / 1710 - 1785 MHz (GSM 1800) 935 - 960 MHz (GSM 900) / 1805 - 1880 MHz (GSM 1800) 2 W (GSM 900) / 1 W (GSM 1800) 20 dB 2 dB
TX Frequency Range RX Frequency Range MS TX Output Power TX Dynamic Power Control MS TX Power Control Step
Table 9.
Options Handset Type
STMP Options
Possible Selection Nokia HSE-1 or HSE-2

Overvoltage protection is provided with the fuses in the control module.

Do not disconnect the SIM card while the power cable is connected to the STM. Storing temperature is -40...+70C.
Nokia Transmitter Booster Unit TBU for GSM 900/1800/1900, D6Z 467155AE/1.0.0
1. INTRODUCTION
The Nokia Transmitter Booster Unit (TBU) is the core of the Nokia Booster configuration. The Booster configuration fits seamlessly into Nokia's 3rd Generation base stations, enabling the same geographic coverage with fewer base stations. The main units comprising the Booster configuration are: Transmitter Booster Unit (TBU) Antenna Filter High-Power Unit (AFH) Masthead Amplifier (MHA) The TBU provides amplification for downlink (transmitted RF). It is a form-fit replacement of one of the TRXs in the base station cabinet and uses the same DC power source and cooling as a TRX. This document describes the main functions, functional blocks, and external interfaces of the TBU. There are three versions of the TBU: GSM900: GSM1800: GSM1900: TBUA TBUB TBUL
Figure 1 shows the mechanics outline of the TBU for GSM 900, 1800 and 1900.
Figure 1. TBU Mechanics Outline
2.1. Features
Following are the main features of the TBU: 7 dB amplification for 65 W output power for downlink (transmitted RF) Continuous self-testing for gain, temperature and output VSWR Internally controlled cooling fans Input overload protection.
2.2. Operation
The TBU amplifies the input signal from the TRX and outputs the amplified signal to the AFH unit.
Figure 2. Conceptual Booster and the TBU The TBU provides the monitoring function for its own operation. During operation, the following are monitored continuously: gain, temperature, input power and output VSWR. If one of these is not functioning properly, an alarm signal is given to the base station controller BCF. The TBU's front panel LEDs display operating status. The TBU replaces one TRX and occupies the TRX's slot.
2.3. Main Blocks

The TBU consists of three main functional blocks: power amplifier, interface module, and two cooling fans.
Figure 3. Main Functional Blocks of the TBU 2.3.1. Power Amplifier The TBU Power Amplifier contains a power amplifier and alarm circuits.
Figure 4. Functional Blocks of the Power Amplifier
The TX (Transmit) output contains an isolator. The isolator blocks interference from the antenna to the TBU. The isolator is also used to sample reflected power. If the reflected power at the TBU output exceeds the set limit, the VSWR alarm is given. Input and output line couplers sample gain and input power, and generate an alarm if nominal values are exceeded. The two highest power levels of the TRX are not used on the TBU configurations. They are blocked by the base station software which derives its information from the hardware data base. If the hardware database is configured incorrectly such that all power levels are available when too much power is applied to the TBU, the TBU generates gain and temperature alarms which shut down the TRX. If the base temperature of the power amplifier exceeds normal conditions, alarm logic drives two fans which cool the TBU mechanics. If the temperature exceeds the operational temperature range, an alarm is generated and the base station software shuts down the TRX. 2.3.2. Interface Board The purpose of the interface board is to connect TBU power lines to the base station backplane. The wiring board includes fuses which protect the base station from excessive current. 2.3.3. Front Panel Alarm Connector Gain, VSWR, and temperature alarms are routed through the front panel connector to the AFH unit. The AFH unit routes alarm lines to the BCFA unit.
There are four interface connectors in the TBU, as shown in Table 1. Table 1.
Connector Name TX IN TX OUT X3 X1
TBU Interface Connectors

Type N N D-9 EURO connector Purpose Transmitter input Transmitter output Alarm signals to AFH unit Back panel connections for power supply

The colors and explanations of the front panel LEDs are given in Table 2.
Table 2.
TBU Front Panel LEDs

Code FLT ALM OPR Explanation Failure (Gain alarm is on) Alarm (Temperature or VSWR alarm is ON) Normal operation
3.2. X1 and X3 Connectors

The X1 connector is for back panel connections for power supply. The X3 connector is used for alarm signals to the AFH unit. The pin configurations of the X1 connector on the TBU back panel and the X3 connector on the TBU front panel are shown in Figure 5.
Figure 5. X1 and X3 Connectors The pin configuration for the X1 connector on the TBU back panel is detailed in Table 3. Table 3.
Pin a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9-a25 a26 a27 a28 a29 a30 a31 a32 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9-b25 b26 b27 b28 b29 b30 b31 b32 c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 c6 c7 c8 c9-c25 c26 c27 c28
X1 Connector (Back Panel) Pin Configuration

Signal NOT USED AGND AGND +26V +26V +26V +26V AGND NOT USED +5V -12V +12V +12V AGND AGND NOT USED AGND AGND AGND +26V +26V +26V +26V AGND NOT USED +5V -12V +12V +12V AGND AGND AGND AGND AGND AGND +26V +26V +26V +26V AGND NOT USED +5V -12V +12V Description NOT USED (Digital ground) Analogue ground Analogue ground Power supply +26V (+24V in TBUB unit) Power supply +26V (+24V in TBUB unit) Power supply +26V (+24V in TBUB unit) Power supply +26V (+24V in TBUB unit) Analogue ground NOT USED Power supply +5V Power supply -12V Power supply +12V Power supply +12V Analogue ground Digital ground NOT USED (Digital ground) Analogue ground Analogue ground Analogue ground Power supply +26V (+24V in TBUB unit) Power supply +26V (+24V in TBUB unit) Power supply +26V (+24V in TBUB unit) Power supply +26V (+24V in TBUB unit) Analogue ground NOT USED Power supply +5V Power supply -12V Power supply +12V Power supply +12V Analogue ground Analogue ground Analogue ground Analogue ground Analogue ground Analogue ground Power supply +26V (+24V in TBUB unit) Power supply +26V (+24V in TBUB unit) Power supply +26V (+24V in TBUB unit) Power supply +26V (+24V in TBUB unit) Analogue ground NOT USED Power supply +5V Power supply -12V Power supply +12V
c29 c30 c31 c32
+12V AGND AGND AGND
Power supply +12V Analogue ground Analogue ground Analogue ground
The pin configuration for the X3 connector on the TBU front panel is detailed in Table 4. Table 4.
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
X3 Connector(Front Panel) Pin Configuration

Signal NOT USED Temp Alarm AGND NOT USED GAIN Alarm AGND NOT USED VSWR Alarm AGND Description NOT USED Temperature alarm to AFH Analogue ground NOT USED GAIN Alarm to AFH Analogue ground NOT USED VSWR Alarm line to AFH Analogue ground
4. TECHNICAL DATA
Following is the technical data for the TBU.

Tables 5 and 6 provide the electrical data for the TBU. Table 5.
TBUA Supply Voltages +26 V +12 V -12 V TBUB Typical Current Consumption 7.0 A @ Pout +48 dBm 1.0 A 0.2 A
Supply Voltages and Current Consumption, TBUA/B/L
Supply Voltages +24 V +12 V -12 V TBUL Supply Voltages +26 V +12 V -12 V
Typical Current Consumption 8.0 A @ Pout +48 dBm 1.0 A 0.2 A
Typical Current Consumption 8.0 A @ Pout +48 dBm 1.0 A 0.2 A
Table 6.
With fans ON With fans OFF
Nominal Power Consumption

200 W @ Pout +48 dBm 195 W @ Pout +48 dBm

Table 7 provides dimensions and weight for the TBU. Table 7.
Parameter Height Width Depth Weight 262 mm (10.3 in) 95 mm (3.7 in) 287.5 mm (11.5 in) +47.5mm (1.9 in) heat sink maximum 6 kg (13.2 LB)

Table 8 provides RF performance values for the TBU. Table 8.
Version TBUA
Typical RF Performance Values

TX Frequency Range 925 ... 960 MHz Gain 7.0 dB Output Power 65 W
TBUB TBUL
1805 ... 1880 MHz 1930 ... 1990 MHz
6.6 dB 6.6 dB
65 W 65 W

Some components inside of the TBU unit contain beryllium oxide (BeO). This must be considered when handling the TBU unit.
Transmission Unit TRU for GSM 900/GSM 1800/GSM 1900 BTS, B6Z 061103AE/2.0.0
1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the Transmission Unit (TRU) versions TRUA, TRUC, TRUE and TRUG, which are used in the GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900 BTSs. The Transmission Unit (TRU) takes care of transmission between the Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs) and the Base Station Controller (BSC). It provides three A-bis connections from the BTS. This document describes the main functions and features, the functional blocks and the interfaces of the TRU unit. The TRU unit is a single-board plug-in unit with two back panel connectors, as shown in the following figure:
Figure 1. TRUA, TRUC, TRUE and TRUG The TRUA is used in ETSI transmission environment providing E1 (2048 kbit/s) A-bis connections. The TRUE used in ANSI transmission environment providing T1 (1544 kbit/s) A-bis connections. The TRUC used in HDSL (ETSI) transmission environment providing HDSL (512 kbit/s - 2048 kbit/s) A-bis connections. The TRUG is used in ISDN-S (EuroISDN) transmission environment
providing up to 4*ISDN-S (2B+D) + E1 PCM A-bis connections. The TRUC, TRUE and TRUG are similar cards but TRUC and TRUG are equipped with a satellite module on the board, which provides different types of interfaces.
2.1. Features
The main features for the TRU are: Operation and Maintenance (O&M) functions is controlled either by using the Service Terminal (ST) via Q1-interface or by using the MMI. Continuous self-testing on the background for components. Other internal equipment tests can be run by the user with the ST or remotely from the OMC. Interface to two integrated radio relays (DMR18-38I). Signal crossconnection allows cable and integrated radio transmission. Branching types B, L, Y, and M on the 8 kbit/s level; branching type C on the 32 kbit/s level.
2.2. Operation
The TRU unit takes care of the transmission between BTSs and/or between a BTS and a BSC. The signal 2M crossconnection allows different network topologies for branching speech and signalling channels between the BTSs and the A-bis links. Hence, the TRU is able to interconnect the remote BTSs and the BSC through a multidrop, point-to-point, multidrop chain and/or a loop configuration. Spur routes to distant BTSs can also be used. This allows efficient and flexible employment of the transmission capacity provided by the terrestrial transmission system. The TRU unit monitors itself and the each of the line interfaces for faults and malfunctions and activates the appropriate alarms when necessary. 2.2.1. Control, Operation and Maintenance The TRU can be controlled either by the Base Control Function unit (default) or by a centralized Network Management System (NMS). The control type is determined during commissioning in the HW database. The user has several tools for operating and maintaining the TRU both locally and remotely depending on the control type selected. The same tools can also be used for maintaining other Nokia transmission equipment in the BTS by rerouting the Q1-interface. If the BCF control is selected, the user has the following possibilities to operate and maintain the TRU unit: The BCF unit monitors the operation of the TRU and reports alarms to the BSC.
Either the ST or the Service Terminal Emulator (STE) can be used for local access. The Man Machine Language (MML) can be is used for remote access.
If the NMS control is chosen, the user has following possibilities to operate and maintain the TRU unit: Either the ST or the STE can be used for local access. The NMS can be used for remote access.
2.2.2. Synchronization The timing of the TRU can be synchronized to the network by the incoming line interface signal (E1 or T1) or by the external 2.048 MHz clock signal used for synchronizing the whole network (With TRUC/E/G also 1.544 MHz can be used). The synchronization source is selected by the SW settings via the Service Terminal (ST) during commissioning, and it can be prioritized. Three separate signals can be prioritized to be the source of the synchronization. If all listed sources are missing, the TRU will use the internal 2.048 MHz clock signal.

The overvoltage protection for the TRU is compliant with the CCITT K17, Blue Book: 10 Arms /50...60 Hz. Surge Protection for the AC: 10 Bursts of 0.3 s Each During 2 Minutes.

The TRU unit is sensitive to electromagnetic charges. The user must take care of proper grounding and wear an antistatic hand strap when handling the unit.
3.1. TRUA
Figure 2. TRUA Functional Block Diagram Line Interface Block The line interface block (LIF) block contains three individual line interfaces between the A-bis interface and the BTS. The main functions of the LIF block are to form the transmit line signals according to the G.703 specification and to regenerate the received, attenuated HDB3 line signal. The supported A-bis interface impedances are 75 or 120 . 2MCC Block The 2M crossconnection block contains an IC-circuit taking care of the 2 Mbit/s level crossconnections between the 2 Mbit/s M/D block, the one or two integrated radio relays, and the LIF block. 2M Signal Handling Block
The 2M signal handling block consists of three functional blocks; the mux/demux block (M/D), the 8 k crossconnection block (8kCC), and the bus interface (BIF): The mux/demux block consists of three MUX-circuits which monitor errors and separate management data from TS 0. The 8kCC block consists of two crossconnection circuits forming the crossconnection between the 4 * 2 Mbit/s signals at the 8 kbit/s level according to the active branching table. Three of the signals are between the 8kCC block and A-bis interface, and one signal is between the 8kCC block and the BTS internal D-bus. The bus interface connects the TRUA electrically to the BTS D-bus.
Clock Block The clock block includes two functional blocks; the synchronization block (SYNC) and the oscillator block (OSC). The synchronization block is the interface enabling synchronization of the TRUA to an external clock, or synchronization of other equipment to the clock of the TRUA. The oscillator block contains a voltage-controlled phase-locked loop oscillator which generates the master clock for the TRUA.
O&M Block The O&M block contains two functional blocks; the measurement block (MEAS) and the control block (CONT). The measurement block contains two SMB-connectors providing two measurement interfaces for the clock and data signals. The control block consists of two processors, several RAMs, and registers controlling the TRUA operation. This block also provides access to the TRUA from the BCFA, the Service Terminal or from the centralised Transmission Management System (TMS), which are used to control the transmission equipment.
3.2. TRUC
Figure 3. TRUC Functional Block Diagram Line Interface Block (LIF) The line interface block (LIF) block contains three individual line interfaces between the A-bis interface and the BTS. The main functions of the LIF block are to form the transmit line signals according to the T1/E1 specification and to regenerate the received attenuated line signal. Framer and master synchronisation (FRMSYN) This block includes three pieces of framer circuits one per interface for handling line codes. One of the framers serves also as a 16 MHz reference clock generator for the unit. Block contains also 2MCC cross-connection possibilities that allows connections to 3rd generation BTS integrated RRI-units. Programmable interface (PIF) The PIF allows data path selection from the HDSL-module or framer. This block also performs the Q1 data extraction's, insertions and summing for data paths.
O&M interface (OMIF) This block converts the Q1 and PC-control interfaces to logic levels for connection to processor and vice versa. Option module interface (OPTIF) The option module allows line interface (LIF1 and LIF2) type to be changed from units internal E1/T1 to interfaces provided by the option module. The module can be controlled by TRU platform or it can be an independent unit. 2 x 2048 kbit/s signals can be brought to cross-connection from module. The module line interface pins are also used for line interface impedance selection. Cross-connection (CC) The cross-connection block makes the cross-connection between line interfaces in 8/32/64 kbit/s level. Cross-connection bus (CCB) Cross-connection bus connects two DCC-asics together. Control (CON) The block consists a processor environment that controls the whole unit functionality. Memory (MEM) The memory block consists of memory circuits for storing the software and unit settings, and RAM memory for temporarily saving the downloaded software. Power supply (POW) Power supply block includes switched mode to generate +3,3V and -5V operating voltages, all the other voltages are generated centralised by BTS. Measurement interfaces (MEAS) Via the measurement interface the user can direct one of selected signal data or clock signals to be measured with external measurement equipment. This selection is made with SW settings. Synchronisation interface (SYNC) This block is the interface enabling the synchronization of the unit to an external PCM-clock, or providing the clock source for some other unit. HDSL module The module provides the functionality of two HDSL interfaces. It consists of two separate HDSL modems with ETSI ETR152 compliant transceiving and framing functions.
3.3. TRUE
Figure 4. TRUE Functional Block Diagram Line Interface The line interface (LIF) block comprises three individual line interfaces between the A-bis and the BTS. The block's main LIF functions are to convert the analog 1544 kbits/s signals into a digital format compliant with ANSI T1.403, and to regenerate the received attenuated line signals. The block also provides overvoltage and overcurrent protection. Framer The framer is programmed to operate at 1.544 Mbits/s. The functions supported include: selectable multiframe format, error checking (CRC4, CRC6), multiple line codes (HDB3, B8ZS, AMI, CMI,
NRZ), alarm reporting, maintenance and performance monitoring. Control and monitoring operations are performed via a parallel 16-bit data bus. The framer has an internal digital oscillator that generates a 16 MHz master clock. This clock is phase locked to a selectable source, either one of the external line signal clocks or an internal clock. The framer derives the 8 MHz system clocks from this master clock. Programmable Interface The programmable interface (PIF) selects the interface to the data cross connection circuitry. The PIF acts as a summing point for O&M signals. Q1 extractions, insertions and summing of data paths are performed. The PIF also multiplexes and demultiplexes the address and data channels between the PIF and data cross connection circuitry. These functions are performed over an 8-bit bus. Data Cross Connection The data cross connection (DDC) provides the connections between the three 1.544 Mbit/s transmission lines and the D-bus according to the branching tables located in SRAM. Control This block performs the TRUE processing using an MC68360 processor. All the normal processing functions (interrupt handling, bus arbitration, watchdog function. memory management, DRAM refresh, communications handling, etc.) are performed here. O&M Interface The front panel Euroconnector is provided for the O&M interface, providing the means of accessing the Q1, EI and DI interfaces, allowing the TRUE to be configured/reconfigured and monitored by external equipment. A CCITT V.11 interface for a local Service Terminal (ST), and a PC node manager interface implemented to CCITT V.24/V.28 recommendations are supported. Measurement Interface This interface provides either the transmitted data, or received data, or the clock signal from each of the 1.544 Mbit/s transmission lines. This can be read from SMB connector, MEAS, located on the front panel. The user can select the signal to be measured using the Service Terminal or MMI. Synchronization Interface This interface provides the incoming transmission line clock signal to the framer, The line clock can then be used for synchronizing the 16MHz master clock. The interface complies with ANSI T1.101 and T1.102.
3.4. TRUG
Figure 5. TRUG Functional Block Diagram Line Interface The line interface (LIF) block comprises three individual line interfaces between the A-bis and the BTS. There is also a slice that contains LIF connections for ExtIF1 and ExtIF2 interfaces. Slices are available only for Nokia Citytalk and Nokia Intratalk Cabinets. The block's main LIF functions are to convert tha analog signals into a digital format, and to regenerate the received attenuated line signals. The block also provides overvoltage and overcurrent protection. Framer The functions supported include: selectable multiframe format, error checking (CRC4, CRC6), multiple line codes (HDB3, B8ZS, AMI, CMI, NRZ), alarm reporting, maintenance and performance monitoring. Control and monitoring operations are performed via a parallel 16-bit data bus. The framer has an internal digital oscillator that generates a 16 Mhz master clock. This clock is phase locked to a selectable source, either one of the external line signal clocks or an internal clock. The framer derives the 8 Mhz system clocks from this master clock.
Programmable Interface The programmable interface (PIF) selects the interface to the data cross connection circuitry. The PIF acts as a summing point for O&M signals. Q1 extractions, insertions and summing of data paths are performed. The PIF also multiplexes and demultiplexes the address and data channels between the PIF and data cross connection circuitry. These functions are performed over an 8-bit bus. Option Module Interface (OPTIF) The option module allows the line interface type (LIF1, LIF2, ExtIF1 and ExtIF2) to be changed from the unit's internal E1/T1 to the interface provided by the option module. The module can be controlled by TRU platform or the module can be an independent unit. Two 2048 kbit/s signals can be brough to the cross-connection from the module. Data Cross Connection The data cross connection (DDC) provides the connections between the three 1.544 Mbit/s transmission lines and the D-bus according to the branching tables located in SRAM. Control This block performs the TRUG processing using an MC68360 processor. All the normal processing functions (interrupt handling, bus arbitration, watchdog function. memory management, DRAM refresh, communications handling, etc.) are performed here. O&M Interface The front panel Euroconnector is provided for the O&M interface, providing the means of accessing the Q1, EI and DI interfaces, allowing the TRUE to be configured/reconfigured and monitored by external equipment. A CCITT V.11 interface for a local Service Terminal (ST), and a PC node manager interface implemented to CCITT V.24/V.28 recommendations are supported. Measurement Interface This interface provides either the transmitted data, the received data or the clock signal from each of the transmission lines. This can be read from SMB connector, MEAS, located on the from panel. The user can select the signal to be measured using the Service Terminal. Synchronization Interface This interface provides the incoming transmission line clock signal to the framer. The line clock can then be used for synchronizing the 16 Mhz master clock. Power The main function of the power supply is to generate the voltages of +3.3 V and -5 V, and provide a soft start for +5 V voltage. All the other voltages are generated centralised by BTS.
The TRU unit is equipped with the following interfaces: Front Panel: Three LEDs. Two SMB-connectors for measurement purposes (one in TRUC/E/G). Euroconnector (3 x 7 pin) for the Service Terminal. In TRUC/E/G D9 connector for Programmable interface. In TRUG D9 (lower) connector for ISDN LINES ExtIF1 and ExtIF2.
Back Panel: Two Euroconnectors. The rear connectors provide connections for the A-bis interfaces, clock synchronisation interface, and for the D-bus interface between the TRU and the other BTS units.
4.1. A-bis Interface

The TRU unit provides three A-bis connection from the BTS to the BSC. Line Interfaces 1, 2 and 3 comply with CCITT Recommendation G.703. The only exception is the tolerated attenuation at 1 MHz for the receiver part. For interfaces 1 and 2 the tolerance is < 20 dB and for interface 3 the tolerance is < 6 dB. In TRUE line Interfaces 1, 2 and 3 comply also with ANSI T1.107 and ANSI T1.403 Recommendations, with < 26 dB tolerance. In TRUC the line interfaces 1 and 2 comply with the ETSI ETR152 standard. In TRUG the ISDN-S line interfaces 1-4 comply with the ETSI DSS1 (EURO-S) standard. The following features apply to all TRU versions, the TRUA, TRUC, TRUE: Three A-bis interfaces to the multidrop highway between the BTSs and the BSC. Rerouting possibilities within the loop network; The transmitted or received signal of each line interface can be measured via the measurement interface(s) on the front panel.
4.1.1. TRUA (E1, 2048 kbit/s) Interface statistics according to the ITU-T G.826 Recommendations. Handling of timeslot 0 at E1 2 Mbit/s interfaces. The frame/multiframe structure complies with the ITU-T Recommendation G.704/706. 75 or 120 interfaces are selected by changing the jumper settings. General Characteristics of Interfaces 1 and 2
Table 1.
Specification Bit Rate Code
Value 2048 kbit/s 50 ppm HDB3
Table 2.
Specification Peak Voltage No-Pulse Level Pulse Width
Transmitter Characteristics of Interfaces 1 and 2

Value 2.37 V/75 ohms, 3.0 V/120 ohms 0.237 V/75 ohms, 0.3 V/120 ohms 244 ns 25 ns 0.95...1.05 0.95...1.05
Amplitude Ratio Between Positive and Negative Pulses Width Ratio Between Positive and Negative Pulses
Table 3.
Specification
Receiver Parameters of Interfaces 1 and 2

Value < 20 dB 75 ohms or 120 ohms > 12 dB/50...100 kHz > 18 dB/0.1...2.1 Mhz > 14 dB/2.1...3.1 MHz
Tolerated Attenuation at 1 MHz Impedance Return Loss
Table 4.
Specification
Jitter in Interfaces 1 and 2

Value G.823 fj > 18 kHz (max. 0.2 Uipp) fj < 18 kHz (max. 0.2 x (18 kHz/fj) UIpp, e.g. 1.5 UIpp/2.4 kHz) 0.1 UI < 10 % pp/20 Hz...100 kHz Satisfies ETS 300 011 < 1 dB/0...20 kHz and dropping 20 dB/decade when frequency > 20 kHz
Allowed Sine Jitter at Input: Jitter Frequency Jitter Frequency Output Jitter When the Input Signal Contains No Jitter Jitter Transfer Function (Gain) Jitter Transfer Function (Gain) in Bypass Mode
Table 5.
Specification
Noise Tolerance of Interfaces 1 and 2

Value < 19.5 dB/A = 10...20 dB/1 Mhz < 23.5 dB/A= 0...10 dB/1 MHz A = 0.32 + 11.32 x SQRT (f/MHz) + 3.38 x f/MHz dB/km
Noise Tolerance S/N, at Bit Error Ratio 5E-7 Attenuation of the Cable Simulator (The measurement corresponds to the near-end crosstalk)
Breakage location: applicable in conjunction with Nokia copper cable line system DL2E. Interface 3
Interface 3 complies with CCITT Recommendation G.703. Table 6.

Specification Bit Rate Code
General Characteristics of Interface 3

Value 2048 kbit/s 50 ppm HDB3
Table 7.
Specification Peak Voltage No-Pulse Height Pulse Width
Transmitter Characteristics of Interface 3

Value 2.37 V/75 ohms and 3.0 V/120 ohms 0.237 V/75 ohms and 0.3 V/120 ohms 244 ns 25 ns 0.95...1.05 0.95...1.05
Amplitude Ratio Between Positive and Negative Pulses Width Ratio Between Positive and Negative Pulses
Table 8.
Specification
Receiver Parameters of Interface 3

Value < 6 dB 75 ohms or 120 ohms > 12 dB/50...100 kHz > 18 dB/0.1...2.1 Mhz > 14 dB/2.1...3.1 MHz
Tolerated Attenuation at 1 MHz Impedance Return Loss
4.1.2. TRUC/LIF1 and LIF2 (HDSL) The TRUC unit provides two line interfaces (LIF 1 and 2) with HDSL (High bit rate Digital Subscriber Line). The rate of the HDSL interfaces can vary between 512 kbit/s and 2048 kbit/s. 75 or 100/120 interfaces are selected by changing the jumper settings. The basic difference between E1/T1 and HDSL transmission in copper wire pairs is that HDSL transmission tolerates line impairments (distortion, attenuation, and crosstalk) better than the E1/T1. This means that by using HDSL technology the wire pairs of in-house cablings (subscriber lines) can be used as transmission media for HDSL without special efforts. Also the potential bridged taps in the local cables can be tolerated. In new installed cables both E1/T1 and HDSL can be used to connect base stations directly if the distances required are adequate. The repeaterless range of transmission with HDSL technology is greater than with traditional E1/T1
transmission. The maximum length of cable (0.63mm) for TRUE interfaces will be around 2 km whereas for TRUC it will be around 5 km. The usability of the HDSL is independent on the transmission network system above the HDSL transmission system. It can be either microwave radio or E1/T1 transmission, for example. Different speed and pair configuration options: 512 k, 1024 k, 2048 k, One pair, Two pairs, Pair backup. Selectable by service menus Interface statistics according to the ITU-T G.826 Recommendations. Handling of timeslot 0 at 2 Mbit/s interfaces. The frame/multiframe structure complies with the ITU-T Recommendation G.704/706. Timeslot 0 available as a normal payload timeslot O&M can be routed via Auxiliary Q1 (AUX-Q1) channel through HDSL link - saves timeslots General Characteristics of Interfaces 1 and 2
Value
Table 9.
Specification
Frame structure Timeslot mapping to HDSL frame
According to ETSI ETR152 According to ETSI ETR152 or Proprietary scheme depending on the selected HDSL connection type Line Code 2B1Q Line signalling rate (on each pair) 2320 kbit/s, 1168 kbit/s or 592 kbit/s depending on the selected HDSL connection type and speed Transmission principle Bidirectional, echo cancelling Pair count Selectable: Two pairs or one pair Maximum tolerable delay difference between the two pairs 60 microseconds Connection start-up procedure According to ETSI ETR152 Connection start-up time 25-50 seconds Connection end-to-end delay (between the interfaces only) 150 s for the pair speed of 2048 kbit/s 200 s for the pair speed of 1024 kbit/s 400 s for the pair speed of 512 kbit/s
Table 10. Electrical Characteristics of Interfaces 1 and 2

Specification Impedance Return loss at 10...500 kHz Common mode rejection ratio at 10...500 kHz Input level range Maximum channel attenuation for adequate operation with 5V/Hz noise level Pair speed: 2048 kbit/s 1024 kbit/s 512 kbit/s Output level Value 135 ohms symmetrical > 15 dB > 50 dB + 15...- 40 dBm (135 ohms) . . 28 dB at 250 kHz 28 dB at 150 kHz 28 dB at 70 kHz + 13,5 dBm (135 ohms) 0,5 dB
4.1.3. TRUE and TRUC/LIF3 (T1, 1544 kbit/s) Interface characteristics according to ANSI T1.403. Handling of timeslot 0 at 1.544 Mbit/s interfaces. The frame/multiframe structure complies
with ANSI T1.403. Balanced 100 impedance interface. Transmitting and receiving functions at the line interfaces, for example, HDB3 coding, clock recovery, and Alarm Signal Indication (AIS) detection. The TRUE and TRUC/LIF3 can also use B8ZS and AMI coding. All interfaces can be configured independently into the E1 mode.
Interface 3 complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.703 or ANSI Recommendation T1.403. Table 11. General Characteristics of T1 Interface
Specification Bit Rate Code Value 1544 kbit/s 35 ppm AMI or B8ZS
ANSI T1-transmitter characteristics (nominal) are according ANSI T1.403 (DS-1) or ANSI T1.102 (DSX-1) specification. Noise and Jitter parameters are tha same as with E1 interface. 4.1.4. TRUE, TRUC/LIF3 and TRUG (E1, 2048 kbit/s) Interface characteristics according to ETSI G.703/704. Handling of timeslot 0 at 1.544 Mbit/s interfaces. The frame/multiframe structure complies with ANSI T1.403. Unbalanced 75 impedance or balanced 120 impedance interface. Transmitting and receiving functions at the line interfaces, for example, HDB3 coding, clock recovery and Alarm Signal Indication (AIS) detection. All interfaces can be configured independently into the T1 mode.
Interfaces comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.703 or ANSI Recommendation T1. 403. Table 12. General Characteristics of E1 Interface
Specification Bit Rate Code Value 2048 kbit/s 50 ppm HDB3
4.1.5. TRUG (ISDN-S) Table 13. General Characteristics

Specification Value
Frame structure Line code Line signalling rate Transmission principle Network interface Data link layer Signalling network layer
According to ETS 300 012 Pseudo ternary code, 2B1Q 192 kbit/s two pair symmetrical point-to-point LAPD (ETS 300 402) DSS1 (ETS 300 403)
Table 14. Electrical Characteristics

Specification Receiver impedance Output impedance Nominal pulse amplitude Longitudinal conversion lass at 10...300 kHz Total phase deviation from input to output Value See Figure 6 For binary ZERO:=> 20 At other times: See Figure 6 See Figure 6 +1.5dB ... -7.5dB -7 ... +15% of a bit period
Figure 6. ISDN Receiver Impedance
4.2. D-bus Interface

The interfaces between the Transmission Unit and the other units in BTS is realized by means of a time-division bus structure the D-bus. The D-bus operates at the bit rate of 2048 kbit/s and information is transferred on the bus by means of a frame of 32 timeslots, with 8 bits in each, for a total of 256 bits. Electrically the D-bus interface is a CMOS.
4.3. Synchronisation Interface

The interface complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.703 and TRUC/E also complies with ANSI T1.101 Requirement. Table 15. Synchronisation Output
Specification Frequency Impedance Amplitude Value 2048 kHz 50 ppm 1544 kHz 50 ppm 75/120 2...3.8 Vpp/120 1.5...3.0 Vpp/75
Any of the incoming clocks (RX1 - RX3) or the Master Clock (oscillator) can be selected to the synchronisation output. Table 16. Synchronisation Input
Specification Frequency Impedance Amplitude Allowed Attenuation Value 2048 kHz 50 ppm 1544 kHz 50 ppm 75/120 2...3.8 Vpp/120 1.5...3.0 Vpp/75 0...6 dB
Synchronisation input clock can be selected to the synchronisation priority list.
4.4. Measurement Interface

The transmitted or received data or clock signal of each line interface (Directions 1-3) can be measured via the Measurement interface on the front panel. The signals available in each connector are given in Table 17. The user can select the signal to be measured via the Service Terminal. Table 17. Measurement Interfaces on TRU Front Panel
Unit TRUA TRUC/E/G Value MEAS. OUT 1: Dir 1 or Dir 3 RX/TX Data/Clock MEAS. OUT 2: Dir 2 or Dir 3 RX/TX Data/Clock Dir 1, Dir 2 or Dir 3 RX/TX Data/Clock
Other features of the measurement interfaces are given in Table 18. Table 18. Other Features of the Measurement Interfaces
Specification Bit Rate Code Peak Voltage Value 2048 kbit/s 50 ppm 1544 kbit/s 50 ppm HDB3 2.37 V/75 ohms
No-pulse Height Pulse Width Amplitude Ratio Between Positive and Negative Pulses Width Ratio Between Positive and Negative Pulses
0.237 V/75 ohms 244 25 ns 0.95...1.05 0.95...1.05
4.5. Service Interface (MI)

Local access to the TRU unit is possible with a Service Terminal via the service interface. This interface is provided via the front panel Euroconnector which can also be used to reroute the Q1-bus to other transmission equipment, for example, radio relays. The service interface can also be used to charge the Service Terminal battery. The service interface complies with CCITT V.11. Table 19. Service Interface Output
Specification Output Impedance Offset Voltage Logical States "1" "0" "3-state" Short-Circuit Current Pulse Rise and Fall Time from 10 % to 90 % Amplitudes Value < 100 ohms 2.0 V < UT 4.0 V . UT < - 2.0 V UT > 2.0 V I < 100 A: U < 5 V < 150 mA < 20 ns
Table 20. Service Interface Input

Specification Impedance Threshold Voltage Logical States "1" "0" Value > 4 kohm UR < 0.2 V . UR < -0.2 V UR > +0.2 V
4.6. Data Channel Interface (DI)

The data channel interface Q1 complies with CCITT recommendation V.11. This interface is available via the front panel Euroconnector. For input and output features of the interface see Table 19 and Table 20. Table 21. Transmission Unit Compliance List
TRU Interface Service Interface Q1 Interface TRUA/C/E Compliant with CCITT V.11 CCITT recommendation V.11 TRUC/E Compliant with CCITT V.11 CCITT recommendation V.11

The three front panel LEDs indicate the status of the TRUA unit. The colours and explanations of the LEDs are given in Table 22. Table 22. TRUA Front Panel LEDs
Colour Red Yellow Green, continuous Green, blinking Code FLT ALM OPR OPR Explanation Unit or the system synchronization is malfunctioning Active test is temporarily disturbing the traffic Control or a test has been activated in the unit Incoming 2M signal is erroneous Power is on and the unit operates normally. Unit is being accessed via the Service Terminal.
5. TECHNICAL DATA
Table 23. TRUA Power Consumption
Voltage (V) + 5 (Vcc) - 12 VDC + 24/26 VDC I(max) 1.5 A 0.2 A 0.1 A P(max) 7.5 W 2.4 W 2.6 W
Table 24. Dimensions and Weight of the TRUA

Specification Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) Weight Value 262 x 25 x 280 mm 0.5 kg
Table 25. TRUC Power Consumption

Voltage (V) + 5 (Vcc) +12 VDC - 12 VDC + 24/26 VDC I(max) 2.5 A 0.2 A 0.09 A 0.1 A P(max) 12.5 W 2.4 W 1.1 W 2.6 W
Table 26. Dimensions and Weight of the TRUC

Specification Value
262 x 25 x 280 mm 0.8 kg
Table 27. TRUE Power Consumption

Voltage (V) + 5 (Vcc) +12 VDC - 12 VDC + 24/26 VDC I(max) 1.5 A 0.01 A 0.01 A 0.1 A P(max) 7.5 W 0.1 W 0.1 W 2.6 W
Table 28. Dimensions and Weight of the TRUE

Table 29. TRUG Power Consumption

Voltage (V) + 5 (Vcc) +12 VDC - 12 VDC + 24/26 VDC I(max) 3.0 A 0.2 A 0.09 A 0.1 A P(max) 15 W 2.4 W 1.1 W 2.6 W
Table 30. Dimensions and Weight of the TRUG

Transceiver Unit TRX, B6Z 465119AE/7.0.0

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the main features and functions, functional blocks, and external interfaces of the Transceiver Unit TRX. TRXA is for GSM 900, TRXD for GSM 1800, and TRXE for GSM 1900 applications. The Extended Cell feature for GSM 900 applications requires TRXA 13 (reference [1]). The main function of the TRX is to provide the analog and digital processing required for handling one carrier both in the uplink (MS to network) and the downlink (network to MS) direction. The TRX is the only part between the transmission unit and the antenna coupling units in the BTS. The TRX includes a transmitter and two receivers (main and diversity) and it supports both baseband and synthesised frequency hopping. The TRX is a plug-in unit that comprises three main sections: the Transmitter (TX), the Receiver (RX), and the Baseband (BB). These sections are located on different sides of the chassis structure to provide the necessary screening. Figure 1 shows the TRX mechanical outline.
Figure 1. TRX Mechanics Outline
1.1. References
[1] Nokia Talk-family GSM 900 BTS, Extended Cell Feature Description, B6Z 060522AE/2.0.0
2.1. Features
The following are the main features of the TRX: Output power of the TRXA is GSM 900 BTS output power class 5: 20 to 40 W at the input of the antenna combiner. Output power of the TRXD is GSM 1800 BTS output power class 1:20 to 40 W at the input of the antenna combiner. Output power of the TRXE is GSM 1900 class 1:20 to 40 W at the input of the antenna combiner. Power control range is 30 dB in 2 dB steps. Power control range when using Nokia Booster is 26dB. Receiver diversity is implemented into the TRX unit by means of two independent receiver chains which are combined at the baseband. The combination is weighted by summing it up using signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) information. The TRX is able to change frequency on successive timeslots. This enables synthesised frequency hopping both in the RX and the TX part. The TRX is able to self-test the whole unit automatically. This selftest can be run during initialisation and during low traffic periods using two free timeslots to perform the test. The test signal from the TX part is sent to the RX part by means of the TRX loop. This enables the BER tests in the baseband part. SW can also be selftested. All TRX SW can be downloaded remotely. The channel number in use is displayed on the front panel of the unit. Frequency hopping and the TRX test mode are also indicated on the display. The display indicates whether the TRX is transmitting or not. HW and FW versions of the unit can be accessed remotely. Extended range cell (E-Cell): the timing of the receiver in the E-TRX (Extended TRX) has been delayed so that it can serve the area beyond 35 kilometres. The maximum range of E-Cell solution is 65 km in BSS6 release.
2.2. Operation
Start-Up When the TRX is powered up or reset, it tests its HW completely. Running the HW tests takes 30 to 90 seconds, and the tests cover over 90 per cent of all the functions including ASICs, memories, controllers, RF part, and DSP environments. After running the tests, the TRX analyses the results, determines its own condition, and reports the results to the BCF. SW Loading After the start-up, the operational SW of the TRX is quickly loaded from the flash memory, or from the BCF when the operational SW is changed. New SW is automatically stored to the flash memory. If the SW contains old, preloaded parts, these will not be loaded. New start-up SW can also be loaded to the flash memory. This feature helps to support error correction, customer-specific requirements, new HW, and new network types. Configuration The TRX is configured before it can act as a network element. The TRX is given all TELECOM parameters, and the synthesisers in the radio parts are initialised. New TELECOM parameters can be sent to the TRX when required. Alarms If the TRX detects an alarm during normal operation, it sends an alarm report to the BCF unit, and, if possible, tries to recover from the alarm. If the TRX malfunctions, it is possible to let another TRX unit to take over by a BCF command. All alarms are notified, but the operator is directly informed of only the most critical alarms. Tests The TRX can be tested any time during normal operation. All TRX parts and interfaces can be tested thoroughly. Some of the tests (TRX - TRU loop, TRX loop, and STM loop) prevent normal operation while the tests are active. A TRX loop can be performed to check that the TRX is internally in order. An STM loop (optional) can be performed to find out the condition of the antennas and the TRX. Tuning and Calibration All RF parts of the TRXs are tuned and calibrated so that the TRX always fulfils the GSM 900, GSM 1800, or GSM 1900 specifications in the Air interface. Tracing During normal operation, the TRX traffic can be traced via the MMI. The internal messages of the
TRX can also be traced.
2.3. Main Sections

Mechanically the TRX comprises three parts: the transmitter part (TX), the receiver part (RX), and the baseband part (BB).
Figure 2. Main Functional Parts of TRX 2.3.1. TX Part The main function of the TX part is to convert the baseband signals coming from the baseband part to a GMSK-modulated RF carrier signal.
Figure 3. Functional Blocks of the TX Part In phase (I) and Quadrature phase (Q) baseband signals from the baseband part are converted to a GMSK-modulated RF carrier by means of an I/Q-modulator. The mixing signal is provided by the TX Frequency Hopping Synthesiser (FHS). The upconverted RF carrier is then amplified by means of an adjustable amplifier (AMP). The gain of the amplifier is controlled by the power control logic in co-operation with the power control coming from the baseband part. The RF carrier is finally amplified by means of a power amplifier (PA). Power control is provided on a timeslot basis which gives a 30 dB dynamic range in 2 dB steps. The power control range with Nokia Booster is 26dB. 2.3.2. RX Part The main function of the RX part is to convert the received RF signal to the intermediate frequency (IF) signal for the baseband part. Diversity RX is included in the RX part.
Figure 4. Functional Blocks of the RX Part The RX part consists of the normal and the diversity branches. The RX FHS is common for both branches. The incoming RX signal from the antenna coupling units is mixed to the first IF signal by MIXER 1. The mixing signal comes from the RX FHS. The downconverted IF signal is filtered (FILTER 1) and amplified by means of the Automatic Gain Control amplifier (IF1AMP). The amplified IF signal is then mixed to the 2nd IF signal by MIXER 2. The mixing signal comes from the Local Oscillator (LO). The IF signal is filtered (FILTER 2) and re-amplified with the AGC amplifier (IF2AMP). The amplified IF signal is then fed to the baseband part for A/D conversion. The AGC amplifier control signals come from, and also go to, the baseband part. 2.3.3. FHS Part RX FHS is located in the RX part and TX FHS in the TX part. There are two outputs in RX FHS, one for the normal branch and one for the diversity branch.
Figure 5. Functional Blocks of the FHS Part Phase Locked Loop 1 and 2 (PLL1 and PLL2) are controlled by the baseband part. Both PLL1 and PLL2 receive the reference clock from the common Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator (VCXO). This VCXO is phase locked to reference clock coming from the baseband part. The RX/TX FHS can operate both in hopping and in non-hopping mode. In the hopping mode, the other Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) is selected by the RF switch to the FHS output while the other one is settling to a new frequency. The switch-over between PLL/VCOs takes place between consecutive timeslots. In the non-hopping mode, only one PLL/VCO is operating and the other is in sleep mode. In case of a failure in the operating PLL/VCO, the other one is automatically selected to the FHS output. 2.3.4. TRX Loop Part The TRX loop function is used for TRX testing purposes. The main function of the TRX loop is to mix a test signal transmitted by the TX part to the RX frequency and to send this signal back to the RX module to make an internal loop test inside the TRX unit.
Figure 6. Functional Blocks of the TRX Loop Part The TX signal is taken from the power amplifier via a directional coupler. This signal is fed into the TRX loop part and input to a mixer together with a mixing signal generated by a Local Oscillator (LO). The result is a signal in the RX band that is fed via an RF switch to the main RX and diversity RX branches. This loop test feature enables the TRX unit to perform a bit error ratio (BER) test in the baseband part. 2.3.5. Baseband Part The main function of the baseband part is to provide the analog/digital interface for the RX and TX parts. The baseband part also performs all the Digital Signal Processing (DSP) functions according to the GSM 900 or GSM 1800 specifications.
Figure 7. Functional Blocks of the Baseband Part The DA/AD interface contains two functional blocks. The DA block supports the following functions: reception of transmitter burst from FHI (Frequency Hopping Interface) transmission of RX and TX channel number to TX/RX part synthesiser frequency hopping control TRX loop control transmitter power control transmitter GMSK modulation DA conversion for power control and I/Q branches
The AD block contains the following functions: AD conversion from IF for normal and diversity receiver buffering of received data for EQDSP (Equaliser DSP block) in one timeslot bursts
The DSP functions of the BBMA/B (Baseband Module) are performed by two separate blocks: the channel coding/decoding block (CHDSP) and the equalizer block (EQDSP). The BBMA/B processes eight timeslots both in the uplink and the downlink. Processing in the downlink consists of encoding, ciphering, and interleaving of the incoming data bits from TRAU (Transmission/Rate Adapter Unit) frames and finally building of the Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) timeslots. The TRAU frames are collected in the D-bus interface, which is connected to D1.
The uplink processing includes de-interleaving, deciphering, and decoding, followed by forming of the TRAU frames. The BBMA/B processes eight timeslots in the uplink. The downlink is managed by the DA block in which the timeslots, received from the FHI, are first GMSK-modulated and then D/A-converted. The detection of normal and diversity timeslots (bursts) received from the AD interface takes place in the EQDSP block. The EQDSP functions include: removing of DC offset calculating of RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) value channel impulse response estimation matched filtering Viterbi detection combining of normal and diversity data
The detected timeslots are then fed to the FHI. The EQDSP may access downlink timeslots from the DA block. If the DA block detects errors in its FHI connection by calculating a checksum, it informs the EQDSP, which then relays it to the Unit Controller (UC). When the TRX loop is set, the EQDSP generates a three-timeslot delay. In addition, the EQDSP controls the AGC setting of the TX/RX part and generates calibration signals to the AD block. The UC block controls all the functions of the TRX. The UC runs the TRX selftests and collects all TRX alarms which are then sent through the D-bus to the BCF unit. All complex control SW and GSM protocols (RR, LAPD, LAPDm) are performed by the UC.
3. INTERFACES
3.1. Front Panel Display
The TRX has a four-digit display located on the front panel indicating the status of the unit. Table 1.
Indication INIT POFF LOOP HOP
Front Panel Status Indication

Meaning Synthesisers initialisation TRX is inactive TRX is making a loop test TRX is frequency hopping
CHANNEL NUMBER
Channel number being used
3.2. Connectors
The TRX has six interface connectors: two on the rear and four on the front panel. The rear side has two Euroconnectors for back panel connection, and the front panel has three RF connectors and one D-connector for testing purposes. Table 2.
Connector Name RX DIV RX TX RS232 X1 X2
TRX Interface Connectors

Type SMA SMA N D-connector Euroconnector Euroconnector Purpose Receiver input from antenna coupling unit, normal Receiver input from antenna coupling unit, diversity Transmitter output to antenna coupling unit DSP testing purpose Backplane connections for D-bus, F-bus and clocks Backplane connections for TRX RF parts
4. TECHNICAL DATA
4.1. Power and Current Consumption
Table 3.
TRXA 13 TX Status PL 0 PL 1 PL 2 PL 5 PL 10 PL 15 Power off
Power Consumption of TRXA 13

Input Currents [A] +26V 3.5 2.8 2.4 1.5 0.8 0.6 0.4 +12V 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.6 +5V 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 -12V 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Pin [W] 131 111 97 70 53 50 49 RF Output Pout [dBm ] 45 43 41 35 25 16 Pout [W] 30 19 12 3 0.3 0.04 Efficiency % 24 18 13 5 1 0.1
Table 4.
TRXD TX Status PL 0 PL 1 PL 2 PL 5 PL 10 PL 15 Power off
Power Consumption of TRXD 11

Input Currents [A] +24V 5.3 4. 5 3.6 1.9 0.9 0.7 0.6 +12V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 +5V 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 -12V 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Pin [W] 190 166 143 100 73 68 66 RF Output Pout [dBm ] 46 44 42 36 26 16 Pout [W] 35 25 16 4 0.4 0.04 Efficiency % 19 15 11 4 1 0.1
Table 5.
TRXE 11 TX Status PL 0 PL 1 PL 2 PL 5 PL 10 PL 15 Power off
Power Consumption of TRXE 11

Input Currents [A] +26V 4 3.2 2.5 1.4 0.7 0.6 0.6 +12V 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.8 +5V 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.5 -12V 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Pin [W] 152 131 114 84 66 63 62 RF Output Pout [dBm ] 45 43 41 35 25 15 Pout [W] 30 19 12 3 0.3 0.03 Efficiency % 19 14 10 4 0.4 0.04

Table 6.
Parameter Height Width Depth

Value 262 mm (10.5 in) 95 mm (3.8 in) 285 mm (11.4 in)
Weight
6 kg (13 lb)

Table 7.
Parameter TX Frequency Range [MHz] RX Frequency Range [MHz] Nominal TX Output Power [W] TX Dynamic Power Control [dB] TX Power Control Step [dB]
TRXA 925 - 960 880 - 915 30 30 dB 2 dB TRXD 1805 - 1880 1710 - 1785 35 TRXE 1930 - 1990 1850 - 1910 30

Overvoltage protection is provided with the fuses on the interface module.

The power transistors of the power amplifier in the TX contain Beryllium Oxide (BeO). BeO is potentially dangerous to human health. Please read and implement all warnings and cautions concerning this equipment.

De 34

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

De 34

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

De 34

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main features of the Nokia Talk-family BTS products?

What are the main features of the Nokia Talk-family BTS products?

What services does the Nokia Talk-family BTS provide?

What services does the Nokia Talk-family BTS provide?

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

NOKIA TALK-FAMILY GSM 900/1800/1900 BTS PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 465267A.403, Version 4

Copyright Nokia Telecommunications 1998, 1

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

Figure 1. Base Station System

Copyright Nokia Telecommunications 1998, 1

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

AFH Unit Description D6Z 467151AE

1.2. Product Family

Copyright Nokia Telecommunications 1998, 2

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

TCH/F FACCH SACCH FCCH SCH BCCH CCCH SDCCH CBCH

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

Copyright Nokia Telecommunications 1998, 4

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

Maximum Number of TRXs with 16, 32, and 64 kbit/s Signalling

Copyright Nokia Telecommunications 1998, 6

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

2.3. Operation and Maintenance

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

Copyright Nokia Telecommunications 1998, 8

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

Copyright Nokia Telecommunications 1998, 9

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

Copyright Nokia Telecommunications 1998, 10

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

2.4. Radio Interface

Copyright Nokia Telecommunications 1998, 11

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

Typical Output Power Levels in GSM 1800 Configurations

16 W */18 W 7 W/18 W 15 W */17 W 6 W / 17 W -

3 x 1 TRX 3 x 2 TRX 3 x 4 TRX 6 TRX, single sector

Typical Output Power Levels in GSM 1900 Configurations

Intratalk/Citytalk Intratalk/Citytalk No US requirement yet No US requirement yet * 3 dB hybrid bypassed

3 x 1 TRX 3 x 2 TRX 3 x 4 TRX 6 TRX, single sector

Copyright Nokia Telecommunications 1998, 12

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

BTS Dynamic Power Control

Copyright Nokia Telecommunications 1998, 13

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

Copyright Nokia Telecommunications 1998, 15

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

2.6. Alternatives and Unit Options

Alternatives in Different Nokia BTSs

alternative alternative in GSM 1800/1900 not available

alternative alternative in GSM 1800/1900 alternative in GSM 900/1800 alternative alternative -

RTC and RMU (max. 6 TRXs per sector)

alternative alternative alternative not available -

Unit Options in Different Nokia BTSs

Copyright Nokia Telecommunications 1998, 16

Printed from DynaText book 465267A4, 2011-11-12

Site Test Monitor Unit (STM)

STMP (Portable STM), option not available not available

16 W /18 W 7 W/18 W 15 W /17 W 6 W / 17 W -